Home

Juniper Networks J2320 Network Router User Manual

1. 9004105 DRAM 2 pairs Crypto External Power Accelerator compact supply Module flash Rear Table 6 on page 17 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis Table 6 J2320 and J2350 Physical Specifications Description Value Chassis dimensions m J2320 Services Router m 1 75 in 4 45 cm high m 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide 18 9 in 48 01 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 15 1 in 38 35 cm deep plus 0 78 in 1 98 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front m J2350 Services Router u 2 61 in 6 65 cm high m 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide 18 9 in 48 01 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep plus 0 78 in 1 98 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front Router weight m J2320 Services Router E Minimum no PIMs 14 8 lbs 6 7 kg u Maximum three PIMs 15 9 Ibs 7 2 kg m J2350 Services Router E Minimum no PIMs 16 3 lbs 7 4 kg 8 Maximum five PIMs 18 2 lbs 8 5 kg J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 17 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J2320 and J2350 Midplane The J2320 and J2350 midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the PIM card cage see Figure
2. 9003838 To replace the compact flash lg 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Remove the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis A WARNING If the fans are still rotating wait until they stop before proceeding with the next step especially if your compact flash is in the horizontal position flat against the system board T Slide the compact flash out of its slot as shown in Figure 81 on page 185 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 81 Removing the J4350 or J6350 Compact Flash 9003835 8 Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 9 Slide the new compact flash into the slot and press down as shown in Figure 82 on page 185 Figure 82 Inserting the J4350 or J6350
3. 166 request system license add terminal command 166 request system license delete command 166 request system license save command 166 requited CHILLY io enne diede t ren eee tei de es 84 rescue configuration resetting with RESCUE CONFIG DUO i eot tt led e e ine ats 22 55 reset power button for restart 20 55 RESET CONFIG button for factory COTIBIBUFGL OL ccu sats rete HRS dei 22 55 RESET CONFIG button for factory Configuration eee 22 35 for rescue Conflgurattonm 22 55 restart after upgrade Drompt 96 Return Materials Authorization See RMA returning bardware a reia i anina ae T 215 packing a Services Router for shipment 220 packing components for shipment 221 PIOCEQUI Cries iie im pe qe set e IR DER ETE QUE 219 tools and parts required 220 RJ 11 connector pinouts TGM550 analog porte 242 TIM514 arialog potts te tete tor tette 245 RJ 45 connector pinouts chassis CONSOLE Port isst uec ere tedts 256 Fast Ethernet DOTbu mee teo den 255 Gigabit Ethernet port ebIM 256 Gigabit Ethernet port uPiMs 255 TGM550 console port 241 TIMSTO ELTI BOES reete A tits 245 TIM521 ISDN BRI porte 245 RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter chassis console port 157 140 TGM550 CONSOlS POL eieiei totes 70 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector crossover DIBOUES Eus M oo d a sue ona au a Lu Det 259 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 co
4. 2 No connection 5 Ring 4 Tip 5 No connection 6 No connection TIM521 Connector Pinout The TIM521 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 45 cable Table 91 on page 244 describes the TIM521 RJ 45 connector pinout Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules W 243 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 91 TIM521 RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 5 Transmit pair 4 Receive pair 5 Receive pair 6 Transmit pair 7 No connection 8 No connection 244 HW Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information To install and use the Services Router safely follow proper safety procedures This chapter discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information m Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 245 m Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 247 m Agency Approvals on page 279 m Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements on page 280 m Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 280 Definition of Safety Warning Levels This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings e NOTE You might find this information helpful in a particular situation or might otherwise overlook it A CAUTION You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the S
5. sss 265 Chassis Lifting Guidelines osios d aare iare TTA nr cnc Installation Instructions Warning Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings ereer 264 Ramps Warning mop e t bete deut eise te ed ne i egt 268 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings crcr 269 General Laser Safety Guidelines aurere traer a ei Eii 269 Class 1 Laser Product Wammimng oooconccnnnnnononcnccccnccnnnncnnnnn nan nnnnnnnnn ns 269 Classe LED Product Warning ENEE etr eu eer ette et 270 taser Bedri Warnlrg sos C rege eA oet re dece PUT vr E ETE 270 Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning o0ccinnninnnnninnncinnnn 271 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings 273 Battery Handling Warning ot ente tette et tud ee ute 275 Jewelry Removal Warning soiset terep tatiy vetes EENAA ETER 274 Lightning Activity Warning cra noe tee He a tiene ESSO oes 276 Operating Temperature Warning ssssss 277 Product Disposal Warning ispred eiaa EAS 278 Agency elle VE 279 Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements nin 280 TN 280 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements sss 280 Canada ura deet petu O rue ed 281 European Stage a EE 282 JAPAN aodio eic verse e t CE i eee eo Pe RC bo Eee D Ve i e E 285 UNICO SLATES En 284 BCC Part Statement iio lanier tere o n er p c Ye 284 FCG Part 6g Statement nte DO erem e ple e bte etel 284 Part 5 Index IMEX A A 289 xiv NW Table of Contents About This Guide Objectives
6. Reboot Feature Summary Snapshot Licenses Licenses Licenses Beg peni Used Installed Needed J FLOW traffic analysis CFLOW 0 1 0 reporting Border Gateway Protocol route 0 1 0 reflection Data Link Switching DLSw 0 1 0 protocol Installed Licenses Add Delete Display Keys DownioedKeys State Version Group Enabled Features G03000002223 valid 2 No group Border Gateway Protocol route Go3000002224 valid 2 No group pert Switching DLSw G03000002225 valid 2 No group jae See venim Inc Al Rights Reserved Trademark Notice Privacy Juniper perunt The Licenses page displays a summary of licensed features that are configured on the Services Router and a list of the licenses that are installed on the router The information on the license management page is summarized in Table 62 on page 163 Table 62 Summary of License Management Fields Field Name Definition Feature Summary Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface m 163 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 62 Summary of License Management Fields continued Field Name Definition Feature Name of the licensed feature m Jseries licenses listed in Table 61 on page 161 m All features All inclusive licenses Licenses Used Number of licenses currently being used on the router Usage is determined by the configuration on the router If a feature lice
7. internal compact flash cee 180 185 PIM Cables itane recepi ped BIO power system ools and parts reouired 175 USB Storage device rt chest ieee needed 188 WATTIN GS iit char Auk snip eO ree 273 major red alarms IO 212 Routing Egger eh ten teca 212 tnanagerrent access dee pid ee cope 155 management device connecting through the CL 159 connecting to web 155 157 management interface address after initial copftguration 155 before initial conftguration 133 defining configuration dito 148 defining Quick Configuration 144 during initial configuration 155 TOO PB ACh iss ttr od Cette tts 132 management interfaces eee i 133 Management ports ene tie te ped 25 55 See also management interface address management interfaces management software Drocesg een 40 manuals COMMENTS Ono ose detiene eb cepas xxi memory See compact flash DRAM modules USB mgd processi soe aria 40 A iaaa ie aaa aane 40 ll el Ee 18 51 Index mM 299 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide minor yellow alarms alternative boot device internal compact flash Routing BEIENEE derent pha modem commands at remote end 42 s bebe e eet 141 at TOULeT end usn es toit turbat tg eco 140 modem connection to router console port configuring modem at router end 159 configuring modem at user end 141 connecting modem to router cee 140 OVELVICW M 159 monoammonium phosphate 105 moun
8. Ctrl u or Ctrl x Delete the word before the cursor Ctrl w or Esc Backspace Delete the word after the cursor Esc d Insert recently deleted text Insert the most recently deleted text at the cursor Ctrl y Redraw the screen Redraw the current line Ctrl l Display previous command lines Scroll backward through the list of recently executed Ctrl p commands Scroll forward through the list of recently executed Ctrl n commands Search the CLI history in reverse order for lines Ctrl r matching the search string Search the CLI history by typing some text at the Esc prompt followed by the keyboard sequence The CLI attempts to expand the text into the most recent word in the history for which the text is a prefix Repeat keyboard sequences Specify the number of times to execute a keyboard sequence Replace number with a number from 1 through 9 and replace sequence with a keyboard sequence in this table Esc number sequence Command Completion You do not always have to remember or type the full command or option name for the CLI to recognize it To display all possible command or option completions type the partial command followed immediately by a question mark Using the Command Line Interface m 93 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 94 To complete a command or option that you have partially typed press Tab or Spaceba
9. Verify IKE Secret Key Private Prefix List 11510101 0 24 d Red asterisk required field a Help icon Displays useful information when you move the cursor over the question mark This help displays field specific information such as the definition format and valid range of the field 9016742 m Red asterisk Indicates a required field m Path to current task Shows the successive J Web tasks and subtasks you selected to display the current main and side panes Click a task to return to it m Icon Legend For the Edit Configuration subtask J Web configuration editor only explains icons that appear in the user interface to provide information about configuration statements C Comment Move your cursor over the icon to view a comment about the configuration statement a Inactive The configuration statement does not affect the Services Router a M Modified The configuration statement is added or modified a Mandatory The configuration statement must have a value 84 m Using the J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Side Pane Elements The side pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 48 on page 85 Figure 48 Side Pane Elements Configuration Diagnose Configuration Chassis groups Interfaces system i Routing Route Information E commit i Class of Service BGP Information Eltraceoptions a OSPF Information Hall i Service Sets RIP Infor
10. c Le tei 140 AUX POT GE 23 36 auxiliary CONSOLE POM ss ste it Tecta 25 56 Avaya 1G550 Integrated Gateway See Avaya VoIP modules Avaya VoIP modules connector Dipouts eee eeee eects eeneeeees 241 grounding 10 AWG replacement cable 67 heat dissipation dees SC 110 LEDs See LEDs non hot swappability sss 67 OVETVIE Wes conuenit ettet est tp iib eene dt 45 power consumption acc rer oct peo Eras 110 power management planning 110 power management troubleshooting 212 requltements zLasoem eerte Et t o Oe dert et 67 SUIMIMALY pss iis cess isstesessressesvadsasve tet eee EEEE EEN 68 69 EE NEE 69 TGM550 maximum gateway capacities 71 TMS EO hie ted esee a t dung 75 El 74 MIB T seo rte te Er qu Peer ee RS 75 B backup compact flash removimg ono 186 backup router defining configuration editor deSCEIDEOTI 1n Decet la Eit DER Cet ORATE basic connectivity CLI configuration editor eects 145 establishing orent ad ato ble 129 J Web configuration editor ee 145 Quick Configuration eree a 141 tequiremehtszx ise teo epe erte 134 sample configuration dept cmt tote qu 149 290 m Index secure Web access Verifying cus e od ea eee ddl e ed d battery environmental Compltance 280 handling osans ce e Dee bei eee 275 UENIUNT e b Bergen npe HI eda 280 BGP route reflectors liCEnSE ntthe atan 162 blank panel e EE 46 for power supply 6550 195 b
11. on chassis DB 9 connector pinouts 257 on chassis RJ 45 connector pinouts 256 on TGM550 DB 9 connector pinouts 241 on TGM550 RJ 45 connector pinouts 241 replacing the cable uis cef ft 174 settings for local CLI Connection 138 settings for modem connection at router for remote CLI ACCESS isi etii iive eae edes 140 settings for modem connection for remote CLI ACCESS 141 contairier Statements cs eerte portet enda 92 conventions how to use this guiden hinan aiin xvi O e hay sede ge Cot xvii teXt and Sy aX ees dette eee xvii cooling system airflow regultrerment 101 destripar deb td etra tb 25 58 Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs EENEG deet tt sete ten 52 joa 256 Copper Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs overview 49 pinouts cords See AC power cords cables DC power cables cover replacing 2320 and D pp 178 Crypto Accelerator Module O ER tbe 18 51 installing libet redet eds 202 205 LOCATION ci see e eed 200 205 A T Pert ere tides 201 204 curly braces in configuration statements xviii customer SUpDOFt eendeitege xxi contacting JTAG su aui ette ee dor xxi contacting JTAC for hardware return 218 information required for hardware return 219 D daemons See processes software data link switching DLSw license 162 datasheets URL zoe tue t been 45 DB 9 connector pinouts Chassis C
12. Configuring Packet Capture JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide Configuring RPM Probes JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation You can send your comments to techpubs comments juniper net or fill out the documentation feedback form at http www juniper net techpubs docbug docbugreport html If you are using e mail be sure to include the following information with your comments Requesting Support Document name Document part number Page number Software release version For technical support open a support case with the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 514 JTAC from the United States Canada or Mexico or 1 408 745 9500 from elsewhere Documentation Feedback W xxi J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide xxii Ni Requesting Support Part 1 J series Overview m Overview of Services Routers on page 3 m System Overview on page 15 m PIM and VoIP Module Overview on page 45 m Services Router User Interface Overview on page 79 J series Overview J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 2 W series Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers J series Services Routers provide stable reliable and efficient IP routing WAN and LAN connectivity and mana
13. Interfaces Overview Configuring DS1 DS5 Ethernet and Serial Interfaces Configuring Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI Interfaces Configuring Digital Subscriber Line Interfaces Configuring Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Configuring ISDN JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference Configuring Link Services Interfaces JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Configuring VoIP JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference Configuring uPIMs as Ethernet Switches JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Routing Overview Configuring Static Routes Configuring a RIP Network Configuring an OSPF Network Configuring the IS IS Protocol Configuring BGP Sessions JUNOS Routing Protocols Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference J series Services Router Advanced WAN Access Configuration Guide Related Juniper Networks Documentation WI xix J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications continued Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Multiprotocol Label Switching Overview m JUNOS MPLS Applications Co
14. J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Chapter 11 Chapter 12 xii Table of Contents Replacing PIM Cables s esed tert tt Pee duel de RD AU EHE e eet urat 177 Removing PIM Cables imita eme cte eet etg n petite 177 Installing PIM Cables cui icto i tr eR EO tado 177 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2550 Routers 178 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers 180 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers 185 Replacing External Compact Flashes oooonnnnnnnnnnnococcoccccccccccncnnnan ono n nn cnc 186 Replacing USB Storage Devices ete ee tee pese oe di lee 188 REMOVING the USB storage DeviCE ue tetti ede 188 Installing the USB Storage Device gero ni e i aeii ii 189 Replacing DRAM Modules sette ee eR te We e EE beo E 190 Removing a DRAM Module 191 Installinga DRAM Module i eit GU bo I bt tete de 192 Replacing Power System Components ssssssssssse 195 Replacing AC Power Supply Code 195 Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 ROUtETS inrer 194 Installing an AC Power Supply in J6550 Routers 2 0 0 0 ees 195 Replacing DC Power Supply CableSiinci desiit 196 Removing a DC Power SUDDly cuisc tad 197 Installing a DC Power Supply retuvieron ditai e 198 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2550 Routers 200 Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerat
15. To remove or install a Crypto Accelerator Module use the following procedures m Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 201 m Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 202 200 1H Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module Se NOTE If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator Module into a J2320 or J2350 Services Router for the first time proceed directly to Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 202 To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the Crypto Module 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 3 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 4 Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle 5 Remove the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 6 Locate the Crypto Module on the system board see Figure 93 on page 200 7 Using a Phillips screwdrive
16. 2 In clic 3 In he Interface Unit he Unit table next to Inet clic ion editor hierarchy next to Configure or Edit able locate the ge 0 0 0 row and click 0 and in the Family section Configure or Edit 4 To delete the existing IP address click the Discard bu on Select the Delete Configuration Below This Point option button from the next display 5 Next to Address click Add new entry 6 Inthe Source box type the address and prefix length for the management interface for example 192 168 1 1 24 7 Click OK 1 Delete the existing IP address delete ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address Set the IP address and prefix length of ge 0 0 0 For example set ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address 192 168 1 1 24 Verifying Basic Connectivity 148 m To verify that the Services Router has the settings you configured perform the followin Verifying Basic Connectivity g task Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations Purpose Verify the configuration of basic connectivity Because the basic connectivity settings appear in different places in the configuration hierarchy displaying the entire configuration at once makes viewing the settings easier Action From the J Web interface select Configuration View and Edit View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show command The
17. Configuring Class of Service J series Services Router Administration Guide Managing User Authentication and Access m JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Configuring SNMP for Network Management JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide Configuring the Router as a DHCP Server JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Configuring Autoinstallation Automating Network Operations and Troubleshooting JUNOS Configuration and Diagnostic Automation Guide XX MH Related Juniper Networks Documentation About This Guide Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications continued Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Monitoring the Router and Routing Operations m JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Monitoring Events and Managing System Log Files m JUNOS System Log Messages Reference Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Configuring and Monitoring Alarms JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Performing Software Upgrades and Reboots JUNOS Software Installation and Upgrade Guide Using Services Router Diagnostic Tools m JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference m JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference m JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference
18. To install the J2320 and J2350 router into a rack 1 Ifnecessary reposition the mounting brackets You can position the brackets in either the center or the front Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater stability J2320 and J2350 Services Routers come with mounting brackets installed on them see Figure 52 on page 117 Figure 52 Mounting Brackets on J2320 and J2350 Routers Mounting brackets 9004143 2 Have one person grasp the sides of the router lift the router and position it in the rack Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers m 117 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 5 Align the top hole in each mounting bracket with a hole in each rack rail as shown in Figure 55 on page 118 and Figure 54 on page 118 making sure the chassis is level Figure 53 Hanging a J2320 Router in a Rack oo 1 ooo 1 KK o o loooooc lt asa es ee scoobpooee a Figure 54 Hanging a J2350 Router in a Rack D 1 1 oo oo Y ooo 1 oe beooooosoopoooooooo ooo 1 dg oals 1 o0 o 9004136 4 Have a second person install a mounting screw into each of the two aligned holes With a number 2 Phillips screwdriver tighten the screws 5 Verify that the mounting screw on one side of the rack is aligned with the mounting screw on the
19. Unlit off Port might be online but it is not receiving traffic For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Optical Interface Support Table 22 on page 52 describes the optical interface support on the 1 port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs over single mode fiber optic SMF and multimode fiber optic MMF cables Table 22 Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs Parameter 1000Base SX Transceiver 1000Base LX Transceiver Model number JX SFP 1 GE SX JX SFP A GE LX Maximum distance 500 m 1640 ft on 50 125 um MMF cable 200 m 656 ft on 62 5 125 um MMF cable 10 km 6 2 mi on 9 125 um SMF cable 550 m 1894 ft on MMF cable Transmitter wavelength 850 nm through 860 nm 1270 nm through 1555 nm Average launch power 9 5 dBm through 4 dBm For SMF cable 9 5 dBm through 5 dBm For MMF cable 11 5 dBm through 3 dBm Receiver sensitivity 21 dBm through 18 dBm 25 dBm through 20 5 dBm Copper Interface Support The 1 port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs also support 1000Base T SFPs model number JX SFP 1GE T 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs 52 The 1 port Gigabit Ethernet ePIM is supported on J4350 and J6350 Services Routers and is available in two versions one with copper connector see Figure 26 on page 53 the other with small form factor pluggable SFP tra
20. e STATUS poRT 1 PORTO ISDN BRI PIMs provide the following key features m Onboard network processor m Bandwidth on demand Field Replaceable PIMs mM 63 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Dial backup m Dial on demand routing backup floating static and dialer watch For pinouts of cable connectors for ISDN PIMs see ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 241 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 ISDN LEDs indicate PIM and port status Table 31 on page 64 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 31 LEDs for ISDN BRI S T and U PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green Blinking Call setup is successful on either the B1 or B2 channel Green On steadily ISDN Layer 2 is active Amber On steadily m ISDN Layer 1 is active m ISDN Layer 2 is unavailable Red Disconnected m BRI interface port is not connected m ISDN Layer 1 is unavailable Unlit Off BRI interface is offline STATUS Green On steadily PIM is online and operational Red Disconnected PIM is not operational and needs replacement Unlit Off PIM is offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide ADSL PIM The ADSL PIM provides a single physical interface to asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL network media types The ADSL PIM one supporting Annex A Figure 5
21. www eia org m A600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard for equipment practice document numbers ETS 500 119 1 through 119 4 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the router s mounting ears which measure 19 in 48 2 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis s external dimensions m J2320 chassis 1 75 in 4 45 cm high 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide and 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep m J2350 chassis 2 61 in 6 63 cm high 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide and 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chassis to 19 in 48 2 cm and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0 78 in 1 98 cm beyond the mounting ears The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack See General Site Guidelines on page 101 CAUTION If you are mounting the router in a cabinet be sure that ventilation is sufficient to prevent overheating If a front mount rack is used we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure Rack Requirements Chapter
22. y t ALARM HA Power LAN ports Console Auxiliary USB ESD point S LED LED button port port ports 3 The components of the front panel from left to right are described in the following sections m Physical Interface Modules PIMs on page 32 m Power Button and POWER LED on page 55 m STATUS LED on page 54 m ALARM LED on page 54 m HA LED on page 55 m RESET CONFIG Button on page 35 m Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 55 m Console Port on page 56 m AUX Port on page 56 m USB Port on page 56 Physical Interface Modules PIMs Physical Interface Modules PIMs provide the physical connection to various network media types For information about individual PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 For pinouts of PIM cable connectors see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 For PIM replacement instructions see Replacing a PIM on page 174 32 NW J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Table 12 POWER LED Chapter 2 System Overview Each J4350 and J6350 Services Router has six front panel slots for field replaceable PIMs These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left to right as shown in the slot number diagram on the front panel shown in Figure 20 on page 55 Figure 20 Slot Number Diagram on Front Panel SLOT NUMBER SLOT NUMBER A a Wm 03 X em 9003823 Gigabit Ethernet and 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs ca
23. Detachable AC power cords each 2 5 m approximately 8 ft long are supplied with the Services Router The appliance coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into the appliance inlet on the faceplate of the AC power supply The coupler is type C19 as described by International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard 60320 The plug at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your geographical location NOTE In North America AC power cords must not exceed 4 5 m approximately 14 75 ft in length to comply with National Electrical Code NEC Sections 400 8 NFPA 75 5 2 2 and 210 52 and Canadian Electrical Code CEC Section 4 010 3 The cords supplied with the router are in compliance Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications W 107 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 50 on page 108 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or region Table 50 AC Power Cord Specifications Country Electrical Specifications Plug Standards Australia 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz AS NZ 5112 1995 China 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz GB2099 1 1996 and GB1002 1996 CH1 10P Europe except Italy and 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEE 7 VII United Kingdom Italy 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEI 23 16 VII Japan 125 VAC 12 A 50 Hz or 60 Hz JIS 8505 North America 125 VAC 10 A 60 Hz NEMA 5 15 United Kingdom 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz
24. Metallgjenstander som er koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svaert varme og kan for rsake alvorlige brannskader eller smelte fast til polene WARNING Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente retire todas as j ias que estiver a usar incluindo an is fios e rel gios Os objectos met licos aquecer o em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligac o terra podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais WARNING jAtenci n Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a l neas de alimentaci n quitarse las joyas incluidos anillos collares y relojes Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentaci n y a tierra lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos met licos queden soldados a los bornes Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 275 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 276 m WARNING Varning Tag av alla smycken inklusive ringar halsband och armbandsur innan du arbetar pa utrustning som r kopplad till kraftledningar Metallobjekt hettas upp nar de kopplas ihop med str m och jord och kan f rorsaka allvarliga br nnskador metallobjekt kan ocks sammansvetsas med kontakterna Lightning Activity Warning WARNING Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity WARNING Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard ga
25. The path displayed in the top right corner of each page provides a context Use this path to see your location in a configuration hierarchy Clicking any link in the path displays the corresponding page You can easily navigate to most subtasks by selecting them from the side pane On pages where you are required to take an action buttons and links allow you to move to the next or previous page as you perform certain actions Most buttons and links are self explanatory But some buttons have different functions on the Quick Configuration and Edit Configuration J Web configuration editor pages For more information see Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages on page 86 and Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor on page 86 Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages Table 42 on page 86 describes the functions of key Quick Configuration buttons Table 42 J Web Quick Configuration Buttons Function Button Commit your entries into the configuration and return to the previous J Web OK page Clear the entries you have not yet applied to the configuration and return to the Cancel previous J Web page Commit your entries into the configuration and stay on the same J Web page Apply Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor When you select Edit Configuration J Web configuration editor the side pane displays the top level of the configured hierarchy committed on the Services Router The main pane displays the confi
26. and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 4 The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the component Pack the router or component for shipment as described in Packing a Router or Component for Shipment on page 220 Packing a Router or Component for Shipment This section contains the following topics Tools and Parts Required on page 220 Packing the Services Router for Shipment on page 220 Packing Components for Shipment on page 221 Tools and Parts Required To remove components from the router or the router from a rack you need the following tools and parts Blank panels to cover empty slots Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat for each component Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1 4 in 6 mm Phillips screwdrivers numbers 1 and 2 Packing the Services Router for Shipment 220 m To pack the router for shipment follow this procedure 1 Retrieve the shipping carton and packing materials in which the router was originally shipped If you do not have these materials contact your Juniper Networks representative about approved packaging materials Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing E
27. continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 48 3 47 Control A 1 4 2 Receive A 37 5 38 Indicate A 5 6 6 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground 59 9 60 Transmit Data B 47 10 48 Control B 2 11 1 Receive B 38 12 37 Indicate B 6 13 5 Signal Element Timing B 30 to 29 E 18 to 17 X 21 DCE Cable Pinout Table 75 X 21 DCE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 37 3 38 Control A 60 4 59 Receive A 48 5 47 Indicate A 52 6 51 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground 2 9 1 Transmit Data B 38 10 37 Control B 59 11 60 Receive B 234 Mm Serial PIM Cable Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 75 X 21 DCE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 47 12 48 Indicate B 51 13 52 Signal Element Timing B 30 to 29 z Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 76 on page 235 describes the Fast Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinout information CS NOTE Either a straight through or cross over cable can be used to connect to the interface Table 76 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 TX 2 TX RX 4 Termination network 5 Termination network
28. continued Term Definition Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer HTTPS Protocol similar to HTTP with an added encryption layer that encrypts and decrypts user page requests and pages that are returned by a Web server HTTPS is used for secure communication such as payment transactions Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM Technique for securely exchanging electronic mail over a public medium PEM is based upon public key infrastructure PKI standards like X 509 certificates SSL certificates are partly based on PEM and end in the suffix pem RSA Public key cipher that can be used for encrypting messages and making digital signatures RSA uses a well known encryption and authentication algorithm that is a part of popular Web browsers Secure Sockets Layer SSL Protocol that encrypts security information before transmitting data across a network SSL requires two keys to encrypt data a public key known to everyone and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message and an authentication certificate Most popular Web browsers support SSL SSL certificate Secure electronic identifier conforming to the X 509 standard definitively identifying an individual system company or organization In addition to identification data the digital certificate contains a serial number a copy of the certificate holder s public key the identity and digital signature of the issuing certi
29. front D nen eseu geg Prep te gies 19 ENER 15 26 installation noe eo te a td este dee 117 interfaces Supported cose ordine ere Rh gt 46 mounting brackets setate eo Tree hibet 117 osi M 4 physical sp cifications isre ana T 17 PIMS S pportEd ssni eain ane 46 POLES Supported stissi btt ee Mend a 46 powermanagement siiig oe Pe tbe 110 Routing Engine hardware 18 TOMO ina dte de bb epe tetur 69 A ES E E 73 UMSS a o 74 OR IEN dL ATE 75 USB POLT EN 24 J2350 J4350 air filter TeplacinB cid e ers Avaya VoIP modules boot devices sherini aine FR BOGE Sequence i oe e ce eee ere deco 19 O bla kei MIU Cop Ea 14 chassis cover eplacing ss tern e ed 178 compact flash Jocatton aiiiar 181 compact flash replacing ooo 181 GOIN SYSTE s sso coit iat o ne rh d res 25 electrical Specifications sss duet tetti 107 external compact flash ign debe 24 EIERE 25 font Panel ni su Leere Le tee ete 19 ET beue M optet eet aedes 15 26 installation eee eee teen ee bee 117 interfaces supporter 46 MOUNTING brackets onere 117 VETVE ERE 4 physical specifications ccc eters PIMS Supported esst restart Suet aeter ETE Re ety ports SUpDOEPted tentar teet teg ban aen power management pOWeE SyStGITE cete dett tg restricted access installation Routing Engine hardware TOMO nro tede y AIMO d beret d e Le d demie TIM STAs chiste d rego te ER ie MDA lease cattle et dete e etes USB DOT GE 4 P
30. or modem over IP calls the DSP supports 40 channels Busy Hour Call Completion Rate BHCC 800 Total of IP and analog telephones that 70 14350 Maximum includes a combination of can be connected to a TGM550 and TIMs analog and IP telephones 100 6550 Touch tone recognition TTR 32 Receivers Tone generation As much as necessary for all TDM calls Announcements VAL 16 playback channels for playing announcements one of which can be used for recording 20 minutes for G711 quality stored announcements and music on hold 256 maximum announcements stored CAUTION Some capacities may change For the most recent list see the Avaya manual System Capacities Table for Avaya Communication Manager on Avaya Media Servers For pinouts of the TGM550 RJ 45 console connector see TGM550 Console Port Pinouts on page 241 For pinouts of cable connectors for the TGM550 analog ports see TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports on page 242 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 174 TGM550 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 57 on page 72 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 37 LEDs for TGM550 Gateway Module Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A failure in the TGM550 requires monitoring or maintenance 72 WW Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 37 LEDs for TGM550 Gateway Mod
31. routing protocol processes are not running In the Backup router section next to Address type the IP address of the backup router for example 192 168 2 44 Set the address for the backup router For example set backup router address 192 168 2 44 Define the IP address for 100 0 he configuration editor hierarchy next to Interfaces click Configure or Edit he Interface table locate the loO row and click Unit he Unit table click 0 and in the Family section next to Inet click Configure or Edit 4 To delete the existing IP address click the Discard button Select the Delete Configuration Below This Point option button from the next display 5 Next to Address click Add new entry 6 In the Source box type the address and prefix length for the loopback interface for example 172 16 1 24 32 7 Click OK 1 From the edit hierarchy level enter edit interfaces 2 Delete the existing IP address delete loO unit O family inet address 5 Setthe IP address and prefix length of Jop D For example set loO unit O family inet address 172 16 1 24 32 Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor m 147 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 57 Configuring Basic Settings continued Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Define the IP address for 1 In ge 0 0 0 he configura Interfaces click
32. see Replacing a PIM on page 174 TIM521 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 41 on page 76 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 41 LEDs for TIM521 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM521 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow On steadily Active A trunk connected to the TIM521 is in use 76 MW Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview For more information about the TIM521 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager Avaya VoIP Modules mm 77 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 78 W Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview You can use two user interfaces to monitor configure troubleshoot and manage a Services Router the J Web interface and the JUNOS command line interface CLI This chapter contains the following topics m User Interface Overview on page 79 m Before You Begin on page 80 m Using the J Web Interface on page 81 m Using the Command Line Interface on page 89 User Interface Overview This section contains the following topics m J Web Overview on page 79 m CLI Overview on page 80 J Web Overview The J Web interface allows you to monitor configure troubleshoot and manage the Services Router by means of a Web browser enabled with Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP or HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer HT
33. show system services web management http https port 8443 local certificate new What It Means The output shows the intended secure access configuration See Also For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Displaying a Secure Access Configuration m 159 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 160 Mm Displaying a Secure Access Configuration Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses To enable some JUNOS software features on a J series Services Router you must purchase install and manage separate software licenses The presence on the router of the appropriate software license keys passwords determines the features you can configure and use For information about how to purchase J series software licenses contact your Juniper Networks sales representative This chapter contains the following topics J series License Overview on page 161 Before You Begin on page 162 Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 165 Managing J series Licenses with the CLI on page 165 Verifying J series License Management on page 167 J series License Overview Each J series feature license is valid for only a single Services Router To manage the licenses you must understand the components of a license key This section contains the following topics Software Feat
34. ssisd DEOCeSS cnet rca 40 checklist for site Dreparation 112 clear operation RESET CONFIG button 22 55 CLE ALLER ACCESS eso e er ege AE CONES d 154 Clearance ace iet e A Bette teft ens 101 CLI See JUNOS CLI CLI configuration editor basic SENO seres ee rat osos pe 145 initial config ratloTt co atcp ett teet dte 145 secure access COnflguration 156 statement N IER eese ne DDR ers 92 CLI terminal See JUNOS CLI command completion description residere cei obe Ole Pes 95 setting O i eere dE E es 96 command hierarchy uie erect deepens 89 command prompts CHANGING ss emet e p de ceto gs 96 configuration mode Gi 91 operational Mode 23 et dte 90 command line interface See CLI configuration editor JUNOS CLI comments in configuration statements xviii commit DUON os htt itp tenete ton heels 87 committed configuration root password regulrement 151 Common Criteria environments management access affected 154 NTE requiremierit radiata tee dede e t 151 password Hrmitattons 151 Index mM 291 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide compact flash backup replacing emer hes GESCHIPUON geo M external description external J2320 and D pp 24 external replacinig uscse ei ette 186 A ced a See abit cored aan 185 location Horizontal 2 2 peret ete 184 location VettiCal a nitet tetti edes 185 minor yellow aam 211 LOMO Bos osse vete teet Solde 185
35. this command displays the following types of commands that match the string specified plus help text m Operational mode commands m help topic and help reference commands you can enter for more information For example to get a list of statements that contain the string traps enter the help apropos traps command in configuration mode help reference string Displays summary information for configuration statements For example to display summary information for the OSPF hello interval enter he command help reference ospf hello interval help topic string Displays usage guidelines for configuration statements For example to display usage guidelines for the OSPF hello interval enter the command help topic ospf hello interval Configuring the CLI Environment You can configure the CLI environment for your current login session Your settings are not retained when you exit the CLI To display the current CLI settings enter the show cli command user host gt show cli CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI complete on space set to on idle timeout disabled restart on upgrade set to on screen length set to 49 screen width set to 132 terminal is vt100 is operating in enhanced mode working directory is cf var home remote To change the CLI environment use the set cli operational mode command Using the Command Line Interface m 95 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Start
36. 1 0 bgp reflection 0 1 0 disw 0 1 0 Licenses installed License identifier G03000002223 State valid License version 2 Valid for device JN001875AB Features bgp reflection Border Gateway Protocol route reflection License identifier G03000002224 State valid License version 2 Valid for device JN001875AB Features disw Data Link Switching DLSw protocol License identifier G03000002225 State valid License version 2 Valid for device JN001875AB Features j flow J FLOW traffic analysis CFLOW reporting What It Means The output shows a list of the license usage and a list of the licenses installed on the Services Router Verify the following information Each license is present Licenses are listed in ascending alphanumeric order by license ID The state of each license is valid A state of invalid indicates that the license key is not a valid license key Either it was entered incorrectly or it is not valid for the specific device The feature for each license is the expected feature The features enabled are listed by license An all inclusive license has All features listed All configured features have the required licenses installed The Licenses needed column must show that no licenses are required Displaying Installed Licenses Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Displaying License Usage Purpose Action What It Means Verify that the licenses fully cover the feature config
37. 1 se 3 0 1 Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and 1 t1 0 0 1 or e1 0 0 1 Dual Port Channelized JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports O and 1 ct1 0 0 0 T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM ce1 0 0 0 4 Port ISDN BRI PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 1 2 and 5 br 1 0 2 ADSL PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Port O at 2 0 0 G SHDSL PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports O and 1 at 1 0 0 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary Table 20 on page 48 provides software release information slot and port numbers and sample interface names for the field replaceable PIMs supported on J4350 and J6350 Services Routers A CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 110 Field Replaceable PIMs M 47 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide D NOTE Although J4350 and J6350 Services Routers support PIMs that were introduced before the JUNOS 8 0 release these routers do not support software releases earlier than JUNOS 8 0 Table 20 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary Supported Softw
38. 103 Location of the Serial Number ID Labels 9004120 J2350JH COM DIRE 001 cb307 700 ALINE JN 10C4720ADL Serial number ID label 216 Mm Locating Component Serial Numbers Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware Figure 104 Location of the Agency Labels Juniper Models Serial Bo A CE XZ M10070 INPUT AC 100 240V 3 5 A 1 5A 60 50 He Maden China E Mig Date 520 017753 Rev 01 9004144 J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels J4350 and J6350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels on the back of the chassis as shown in Figure 105 on page 217 and an agency label on the bottom front corner as shown in Figure 106 on page 218 Figure 105 Location of Serial Number ID Labels Wu p HW HC LLL UI J 4350 JB CT VT COLETTE HI 0121ea925 200 0000 0 EURO 0 AU TAT OUI DATT 0010dbd38580 Locating Component Serial Numbers Mm 217 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 106 Location of the Agency Labels Models WII J 4350 JB DC N Serial III 0156012006000098 MAC WII III II 0010dbd38580 Juniper ID ween INPUT AC 100 240V A 50 60 Hz INPUT DC 48V t0 60V MAX 20A g003832 in Malaysia Serial ID label PIM Serial Number Label PIMs are field replaceable Each PIM has a unique serial number The serial number label is
39. 2 cm of clearance around the ventilation openings WARNING Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Networks router dan ook oververhit raakt dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40 C wordt overschreden Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt dient er minstens 15 2 cm speling rond de ventilatie openingen te zijn WARNING Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi sita ei saa k ytt tilassa jonka lampotila ylitt korkeimman suositellun ymp rist l mp tilan 40 C Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi tuuletusaukkojen ymp rille on j tett v ainakin 15 2 cm tilaa WARNING Attention Pour viter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks router ne l utilisez pas dans une zone o la temp rature ambiante est sup rieure 400C Pour permettre un flot d air constant d gagez un espace d au moins 15 2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations WARNING Warnung Um einen Router der router vor berhitzung zu sch tzen darf dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene Maximum von 400C berschreitet Um L ftungsverschlu zu verhindern achten Sie darauf da amp mindestens 15 2 cm lichter Raum um die L ftungs ffnungen herum frei bleibt WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router non adoperateli in un locale
40. 48 VDC and RTN Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a DC source power cable lug to the terminal block e Using one of the removed screws secure the positive DC source power cable lug to the RTN terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not Connecting Power m 125 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 126 m overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw f Using the other removed screw secure the negative DC source power cable lug to the 48 VDC terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw g Dress the power cables appropriately h Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block Verify that the power cables do not block access to router components or drape where people can trip on them On 2520 and J2350 routers use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain on the cable see Figure 62 on page 126 a Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable and insert it into the opening on the tie b Pullthe end to tighten the tie To release the tie from the cable press down the tab on the tie and loosen it Figure 62 Connecting DC Power to the J2350 Services Router Connecting Power Grounding lug Screw with captive washer Protective earthing point on chassis DC Terminal block Screw with cap
41. 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Activity Logging and Monitoring System log J Web event viewer Traceroute Administration Supports the following external administrator databases m RADIUS m TACACS Autoinstallation Configuration rollback Button operated configuration rescue CONFIG Confirmation of configuration changes Software upgrades Supports the following features for automating network operations and troubleshooting m Commit scripts m Operation scripts m Event policies J series Software Features and Licenses M 11 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 HN Jseries Software Features and Licenses Chapter 2 System Overview J series J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers have chassis that are similar but with important differences J2320 J2350 and J4350 routers have a single nonredundant power supply and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J6350 routers have redundant power supplies and a standard Crypto Accelerator Module For field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules the J2320 has three slots the J2350 has five slots and the J4350 and J6350 have six slots Of the six slots two on the J4350 and four on the J6350 are enhanced high speed slots All J series routers run the JUNOS Internet software This chapter cont
42. 6 RX 7 Termination network 8 Termination network Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 77 on page 255 describes connector pinout information for 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM ports Table 77 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal Name Function 1 BI DA Bidirectional pair A 2 DL DA Bidirectional pair A Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout MN 235 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 77 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal Name Function 3 BI DB Bidirectional pair B 4 BI_DC Bidirectional pair C 5 BI_DC Bidirectional pair C 6 BI_DB Bidirectional pair B 7 BI_DD Bidirectional pair D 8 BI_DD Bidirectional pair D Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Chassis Console Port Pinouts 236 m Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 78 on page 256 describes connector pinout information for 1 port Gigabit Ethernet ePIM ports Table 78 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinouts Pin Signal 1 MDIO 2 MDIO 5 MDI 4 MDI2 5 MDI2 6 MDI 7 MDI3 8 MDIS5 The console port on a J series Services Router chassis has an RJ 45 connector Table 79 on page 257 provides RJ 45 chassis console connector pinout information An RJ 45 cable is supplied with the router To conne
43. 6 o connect 240 m E3andT3 BNC Connector Pinout ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts The 1 port and 4 port ISDN PIMs use an RJ 45 cable which is not supplied with the PIMs Table 86 on page 241 describes the RJ 45 connector pinout Table 86 ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connect 2 No connect 5 RJ SX P 4 RJ SR P 5 RJ SR N 6 RJ SX N 7 No connect 8 No connect 9 Shielded 10 Shielded 2 Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules The Avaya VoIP modules supported on the Services Router accept different kinds of network cables TGM550 Console Port Pinouts on page 241 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports on page 242 TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 245 TIM514 Connector Pinout on page 243 TIM521 Connector Pinout on page 243 TGM550 Console Port Pinouts The console port on a TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module has an RJ 45 connector Table 87 on page 242 provides TGM550 RJ 45 console connector pinout information An RJ 45 cable is supplied with the TGM550 ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout M 2421 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide S NOTE Two different RJ 45 cables and RJ 45 to DB 9 adapters are provided Do not use the RJ 45 cable and adapter for the Services Router console port to connect to the TGM550 console port To connect the console port to an ex
44. Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Figure 58 Completing the Installation Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers You connect the interfaces installed in the Services Router to various network media For more information about the network interfaces supported on the router see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide 1 Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the interface as specified in Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 2 Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the interface faceplate 5 Arrange the cable as follows to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points a Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor b Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop c Place fasteners on the loop to help maintain its shape Chassis Grounding To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation the Services Router must be adequately grounded before power is connected In addition to the grounding pin on the AC power plug cord a threaded insert PEM nut screw and washer are provided on the rear of the chassis to connect the router to earth ground A CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables tha
45. DSL access multiplexer DSLAM that it is about to go offline ePIM Enhanced PIM A particular type of high speed PIM such as the Gigabit Ethernet ePIM or 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM which can be inserted only in high speed slots slots 5 and 6 on a J4350 Services Router or slots 2 3 5 and 6 on a J6550 Services Router floating static route Route with an administrative distance greater than the administrative distance of the dynamically learned versions of the same route The static route is used only when the dynamic routes are no longer available When a floating static route is configured on an interface with a dialer filter the interface can be used for backup ISDN S T interface Interface between an ISDN network and a network termination device consisting of two twisted pairs one each for transmitting and receiving The S T interface usually resides in the customer premises and operates at 192 Kbps of which ISDN traffic accounts for 144 Kbps ISDN U interface Single twisted pair interface line connecting the customer premises unit in an ISDN network to the central office A U interface runs at 144 Kbps 128 Kbps for two B channels and 16 Kbps for the D channel plain old telephone service POTS Standard telephone service that allows limited speed and bandwidth of 52 Kbps which is also know as public switched telephone network PSTN Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN service intended for high
46. EN 60950 1 2001 411 EN 60825 1 19M4 41 42 EN 300 386 V1 3 3 2005 EN 55024 1998 Al A2 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 55022 1998 A 1 2000 A 2003 Class A EN 61000 4 2 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61000 4 4 EN 61000 4 6 EN 61000 4 5 EN 61000 4 11 5 and 11 AC only I E s Ji e Place Sagnatun Date Sunnyvale CA John Lockwood 06 20 2007 282 HN Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information y Juniper ES NETWORK Declaration of Conformity Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA declares that under our sole responsibility the product s Internet Router Model 34350 J36350 are in conformity with the provisions of the following EC Directives including all amendments and with national leg Limplementing these directives Low Voltage Directive 73 23 E EC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC gt following harmonized standards have been applied EN 60950 1 2001 A11 EN 60825 1 1994 41 A2 EN 300 386 V 1 3 1 2001 EN 55024 1998 EN 5022 1998 A1 A2 N 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 N 61000 4 2 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61000 4 4 EN 61000 4 5 EN 61000 4 6 EN 61000 4 11 Mace Sunnyvale ot I 0 09 2006 Japan OBI PARAR SENS A ERAS VCCI VDE WESC 17 B BEATE RC LOREM mEmRECENTASL L RAMEE LCWETA ZO lr VEY a AENOR Lc RENE FARE ELTI LSN ES Posen oe CELB H BL LT FAV The preceding translates as follows This is a Class B product based on t
47. Key Components A license key consists of two parts m License ID Alphanumeric string that uniquely identifies the license key When a license is generated it is given a license ID m License data Block of binary data that defines and stores all license key objects For example in the following typical license key the string li29183743 is the license ID and the trailing block of data is the license data 1129183743 4ky27y acasck 82fsj6 jzsn4q ix8i8d adj7kr 8uq38t ix8i8d jzsn4q ix8i8d 4ky27y acasck 82fsj6 ii8i7e adj7kr 8uq38t ks2923 a9382e The license data defines the device ID for which the license is valid and the version of the license Before You Begin Before you begin managing the J series licenses complete the following tasks m Purchase the licenses you require m Establish basic connectivity See Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 129 162 m Before You Begin Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface To manage licenses with the J Web interface you perform the following tasks m Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 164 m Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 165 m Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface on page 165 m Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 165 Figure 70 on page 165 shows the J Web Licenses page Figure 70 Licenses Page ROUTER J6300 Software
48. Lr Lea restricted access J2550 restricted access J4550 and A ena 25 57 58 118 safety guidelines and wamings 265 Site checklist ss aseo tere dence i tees 112 site guidelines 3 il ttes a 101 USB Storage DEVICE ded ipe tere etes ded ee 189 Integrated Services Digital Network See ISDN interface software Drocese ooccoicinnccccccccooncncccccconnnoncnons 40 interfaces 25320 OVERVIEWS ce det Dod d er eade 4 J2320 types supported eee 46 EE 5 J2350 types supported eters 46 14550 OVerVIG Wu opto Ge eset eet 5 J4350 types supported eters 47 6550 OVEIVIEWS inteso rt bere rH ease sonnei 6 J6550 types supported Avete 47 Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide version of TJUNOS SOftWAte ies irit tien aay eei read 81 ISDN BRI ports BRL SAT s eter itp tende re tei gosta ated 65 for TIM521 See TIM521 CED States tete onte thes eret dg provisioning E RJ 45 connector pinouts 241 ISDN GE 57 ISDN provisioning HH 112 See also ISDN BRI ports J ELO W licenciada ERE Dt tent 162 J series Avaya VoIP modules 67 establishing secure Web accesg 151 establishing software connectivity 129 feature SUMMA ane reete tenere recepte 7 hardWadIleun cer var RR E ee ES 15 hardware replace menta c o oreet ge 175 Hard Ware Perris EE 215 HTTPS Web ACCESS etarras etel tete A 151 installation and conpecton 115 JUNOS Internet software overview nD leet 161 modelsavailable meo tas o cl
49. M 34 female Standard Normally 18 Table 73 on page 233 included with M 34 connector shell X 21 DTE DB 15 male M3 threaded jackscrews 13 Table 74 on page 255 X 21 DCE DB 15 female MS threaded jacknuts 15 Table 75 on page 234 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout Table 66 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 60 2 Transmit Data 1 3 Receive Data 48 4 Request to Send 57 5 Clear to Send 9 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 Data Carrier Detect 56 15 Transmit Clock 5 17 Receive Clock 41 18 Local Loopback 55 20 Data Terminal Ready 226 HW Serial PIM Cable Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 66 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 52 24 Terminal Clock 22 to 21 18 to 17 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinout Table 67 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 1 2 Transmit Data 60 5 Receive Data 57 4 Request to Send 48 5 Clear to Send 55 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 Data Carrier Detect 56 15 Transmit Clock 52 17 Receive Clock 45 18 Local Loopback 9 20 Data Terminal Ready 5 24 Terminal Clock 22 to 21 E zi RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout Table 68 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pi
50. Modules M 73 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide TIM510 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 58 on page 74 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 38 LEDs for TIM510 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM510 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Green On steadily Active The TIM510 is online with network traffic TST Yellow On steadily Test A test is being performed on the TIM510 through the Media Gateway Controller MGC SIG Green On steadily Signal The link to the central office CO is active For more information about the TIM510 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module The TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module Figure 45 on page 74 also known as the TIM514 analog media module has four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk ports Figure 43 TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 9003857 SES NOTE For analog direct inward dialing DID trunks you must use the four analog telephone LINE ports You cannot use the four analog trunk TRUNK ports for analog DID trunks You can configure TIM514 ports as described in Table 59 on page 75 74 W Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 39 TIM514 Possible Port Configurations Possible Analog Telephone LINE Port Possible A
51. Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame mounted DC power distribution panels one of which might be located at the top of the rack that houses the router A pair of cables one input and one return connects each set of terminal studs to the power distribution panel CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply WARNING Power plant ground and chassis ground must be connected to the same building ground CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router Each DC power cable 48 VDC and return must be 14 AWG single strand wire cable or as permitted by the local code Each lug attached to the power cables must be a ring type vinyl insulated TV14 6R lug or equivalent NOTE Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on them For information about the DC power supply see J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 13
52. PC See management device personnel Warning ute rete doe etes 248 PIC See PIMs PIM number always O0 178 PIMs Physical Interface Modules 4 Port Rast Ethernet nanunog aa 62 4 PortISDN BRG aad iee ino 65 AD rta tia 64 Avaya VoIP modules See Avaya VoIP modules cables and Connectors ninas 225 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 PUA POL EE 56 Dual Port Fast Ethernet 61 Dual Port Serial deett teet eere ps 55 DualPort Tvn 56 JU SM PE PETER cdta apa 59 Failure stets e Ced 212 field replaceable PiMs eee 46 EE EE 66 Gigabit Ethernet ePlMS ooininnnccinnacciconcccnoninc 52 Gigabit Ethernet uPIMS 4 ce ette 49 heat dissIpationicscm neret e t cea ees 110 installirig Ni in 176 installing cables tad 177 LEDs See LEDs major Fed Alaris cuc tete ran 212 midplane to Routing Engine ee 18 31 Don bot swappabilltv ee 43 175 176 offline roublesbooting 212 OVEIVIEW T 45 See also Avaya VoIP modules PIM number always 0 178 215 POwWer consuMPlON ridad Fre eh edes 110 power management planning ssss 110 power management troubleshooting 212 removing i a sdb ie su Les sd E sabre 174 replacing cables boues tete 177 serial number Label 218 slot numbering J2320 and Dan 20 slot numbering J4350 and Ienpn 55 po 59 Index pinouts J2350 types s pported seite etes 46 ADSE Rd COMMECCOM eer Sm 2
53. Received Line Signal Detector 55 H Data Terminal Ready 41 K Test Mode 60 P 59 Transmit Data A 1 R 2 Receive Data A 59 S 60 Transmit Data B 2 T 1 Receive Data B 52 U 51 Terminal Timing A 5 V 6 Receive Timing A 51 W 52 Terminal Timing B 6 X 5 Receive Timing B 56 Y 55 Transmit Timing A 55 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 Ea a 18 to 17 d x 232 Mm Serial PIM Cable Specifications V 35 DCE Cable Pinout Table 73 V 35 DCE Cable Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground 57 B Signal Ground 57 C Request to Send 48 D Clear to Send 55 E Data Set Ready 15 F Received Line Signal Detector 9 H Data Terminal Ready 45 K Test Mode 1 P 2 Transmit Data A 60 R 59 Receive Data A 2 S 1 Transmit Data B 59 T 60 Receive Data B 5 U 6 Terminal Timing A 52 V 51 Receive Timing A 6 W 5 Terminal Timing B 51 X 52 Receive Timing B 56 Y 55 Transmit Timing A 55 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 X 21 DTE Cable Pinout Table 74 X 21 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 233 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 74 X 21 DTE Cable Pinout
54. Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module The TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module Figure 44 on page 76 also known as the TIM521 BRI media module has four ports with RJ 45 jacks that can be administered as ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI trunk connections Each ISDN BRI Avaya VoIP Modules M 75 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide port has two B channels plus a D channel Up to two TIM521s with 4 BRI trunk ports each can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router Figure 44 TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 9003859 For ISDN BRI trunking the TIM521 supports up to four BRI interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T reference point Information is communicated on each port in two ways m Over two 64 Kbps B channels called B1 and B2 that can be circuit switched simultaneously NOTE The TIM521 does not support BRI stations or combining both B channels together to form a 128 Kbps channel m Over a 16 Kbps channel called the D channel that is used for signaling The TIM521 occupies one time slot for all four D channels The circuit switched connections have an a law or mu law option for voice operation The circuit switched connections operate as 64 Kbps clear channels transmitting data For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM521 see TIM521 Connector Pinout on page 245 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module
55. Secure Web Access m Obtain an SSL certificate from a trusted signing authority See Generating SSL Certificates on page 155 Generating SSL Certificates To enable secure Web access you must first generate a digital SSL certificate and then enable HTTPS access on the Services Router To generate an SSL certificate 1 Enter the following openssl command in your Secure Shell command line interface The openssl command generates a self signed SSL certificate in the privacy enhanced mail PEM format It writes the certificate and an unencrypted 1024 bit RSA private key to the specified file openssl req x509 nodes newkey rsa 1024 keyout filename pem out filename pem Replace filename with the name of a file in which you want the SSL certificate to be written for example new pem 2 When prompted type the appropriate information in the identification form For example type US for the country name 3 Display the contents of the file new pem cat new pem Copy the contents of this file for installing the SSL certificate You can use either J Web Quick Configuration or a configuration editor to install the SSL certificate and enable HTTPS Configuring Secure Web Access Navigate to the Secure Access Quick Configuration page by selecting Configuration gt Quick Configuration gt Secure Access On this page you can enable HTTP and HTTPS access on interfaces for managing Services Routers through the Web interface Yo
56. Settings Default Gateway Backup Router A Domain Name System DNS server on the network maintains a database for resolving hostnames and IP addresses Network devices can query the DNS server by hostnames rather than IP addresses The router accesses the DNS servers that are added to the configuration to resolve hostnames in the order in which you list them If you plan to include your router in several domains you can add these domains to the configuration so that they are included in a DNS search When DNS searches are requested the domain suffixes are appended to the hostnames A default gateway is a static route that is used to direct packets addressed to networks not explicitly listed in the routing table If a packet arrives at the Services Router with an address that the router does not have routing information for the router sends the packet to the default gateway The default gateway entry is always present in the routing and forwarding tables You can specify a backup router to take over when the routing protocol process of the Services Router is not running usually when the Services Router is booting or if its routing protocol process has failed Packets arriving at a Services Router in this situation are routed to the backup router When the routing protocol process starts up again the address of the backup router is removed from the routing and forwarding tables of the Services Router The backup router must be located on t
57. a Help Link to context sensitive help information m About Link to information about the J Web interface such as the version number m Logout Ends your current login session with the Services Router and returns you to the login page m Taskbar Menu of J Web tasks Click a J Web task to access it Monitor View information about configuration and hardware on the Services Router Configuration Configure the Services Router with Quick Configuration or the configuration editor and view configuration history s Diagnose Troubleshoot network connectivity problems s Manage Manage files and licenses upgrade software and reboot the Services Router m Events View events and set up filters for an event summary s Alarms View the alarm summary Using the J Web Interface m 83 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Main Pane Elements The main pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 47 on page 84 Figure 47 Main Pane Elements Diagnose Manage Events Logged in as regress Help About Logout Configuration gt Quick Configuration gt IPSec Path to current task Quick Configuration IPSec Tunnels Add an IPSec Tunnel Current task Tunnel Information Help icon Help information Local Tunnel Endpoint al Tunnel t Remote Tunnel Endpoint Externally routable IP address that is the local endpoint of the IKE Secret Key de IPSec tunnel
58. a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally responsible manner Requirements and Specifications All Services Routers are available with AC power J2350 J4350 and J6550 routers are also available with DC power For information about each router s power system see J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 15 and J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 For site wiring and power system guidelines requirements and specifications see the following sections m Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 106 m Router Power Requirements on page 106 m AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 107 m DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 108 m Planning for Power Management on page 110 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications W 105 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines A WARNING DC powered J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restr
59. and J4350 and J6550 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 To connect the DC power cable during initial installation see Connecting DC Power on page 124 To replace a DC power cable see Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 196 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications W 109 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Planning for Power Management 110 m Before you install a chassis or add a new PIM to an existing chassis verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed does not exceed the power and heat capacities for that model Add the power and heat tokens required by each PIM and compare them to the capacity of the chassis CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for that model 1 Check Table 51 on page 110 to determine the token values for power and heat for each PIM that you plan to install in the chassis 2 Add the power tokens and heat dissipation tokens for all PIM to be installed in the chassis 5 Verify that the total number of power tokens and the total number of heat dissipation tokens do not exceed the ma
60. and VoIP Module Overview Table 27 LEDs for Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily PIM is online and operational Unlit Off PIM is not online STATUS Green On steadily Port is online with no alarms or failures and he physical layer is active Red Online Port is active with a ocal alarm The router has detected a failure and the physical layer is inactive Yellow Online Port is online with alarms for remote failures Unlit Offline Port is disabled For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide The T3 also known as DS5 PIM Figure 32 on page 59 and E3 PIM Figure 55 on page 60 provide a physical connection to T5 or E5 network media types The T5 and E3 PIMs include one physical T3 or E3 port with an integrated data service unit DSU Figure 32 T3 PIM 9002327 Field Replaceable PIMs m 59 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 60 m Figure 33 E3 PIM 9002334 The T5 and E3 PIMs provide the following key features m Onboard network processor m Integrated DSU Eliminates the need for a separate external device m Subrate and scrambling options with support for major DSU vendors m Independent internal and external clocking system m Loopback payload supported only on T5 PIM
61. automatic switchover migration and survivability features Modem backup connection to the MGC Dynamic call admission control CAC for WAN interfaces m Management One serial port for console access over an RJ 45 connector cable es NOTE The RJ 45 console cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the TGM550 are different from the RJ 45 cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the Services Router for console connections to the Services Router You cannot use the RJ 45 cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the Services Router for console connections to the TGM550 Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 56 on page 71 lists the maximum number of media servers telephones TIMs and so on that are supported by the TGM550 installed on a J4350 or J6550 Services Router Table 36 TGM550 Maximum Media Gateway Capacities Hardware or Feature TGM550 Maximum Capacity Additional Information TGM550s that can be controlled by an 250 This number also applies if a Avaya S8500 or S8700 Media Server combination of Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G550 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server TGM550s that can be controlled byan 5 This number also applies if a Avaya S8400 Media Server combination of Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G550 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server TGM550s that can be controlled by an 49 T
62. certificate see Generating SSL Certificates on page 153 To add a certificate 1 Click Add Opens the Add a Local Certificate page 2 Typeaname in the Certificate Name box for example new 5 Paste the generated certificate and RSA private key in the Certificate box To delete a certificate select it and click Delete HTTP Web Access Enable HTTP Access Enables HTTP access on interfaces To enable HTTP access select the Enable HTTP access check box Enable HTTP on All Interfaces Enables HTTP access on all interfaces at one time To enable HTTP access on all interfaces select the Enable HTTP on All Interfaces check box HTTP Enabled Specifies interfaces on which you want to Select and deselect interfaces by clicking the direction Interfaces enable HTTP access arrows m To enable HTTP access on an interface add the interface to the HTTP Interfaces list m To disable HTTP access on an interface add the interface to the Logical Interfaces list HTTPS Web Access Enable HTTPS Access Enables HTTPS access on interfaces To enable HTTPS access select the Enable HTTPS access check box HTTPS Certificate Specifies SSL certificates to be used for encryption This field is available only after you have created an SSL certificate To specify the HTTPS certificate select a certificate from the HTTPS Certificate list for example new Configuring Secure Web A
63. contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software whether oral or written including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained herein No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing by the party to be charged If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this Agreement This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language and the Parties agree that the English version will govern For Canada Les parties aux pr sent s confirment leur volont que cette convention de m me que tous les documents y compris tout avis qui s y rattach soient redig s en langue anglaise Translation The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language Abbreviated Table of Contents Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 About This Guide J series Overview Overview of Services Routers System Overview PIM and V
64. drive oa ips o o HS D H mg Ge ee T I o Doc Keen Sia e is T Il Midplane N pa H bi ooooo000 o oo o anne L H oo d A ama 8 d Se m 8 2 D Physical Interface Front Module PIM Table 11 on page 30 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis Table 11 J4350 and J6350 Physical Specifications Description Value Chassis dimensions m 3 44 in 8 74 cm high 17 44 in 44 3 cm wide 19 44 in 48 38 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 21 13 in 55 67 cm deep plus 0 5 in 1 27 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front Router weight m j4550Services Router m Minimum no PIMS 23 Ib 10 4 kg a Maximum six PIMs 25 3 lb 11 5 kg m J6350 Services Router m Minimum no PIMs and one power supply 25 5 lb 11 6 kg m Maximum six PIMs and two power supplies 50 7 lb 13 9 kg 30 HN J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview J4350 and J6350 Midplane The midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the PIM card cage see Figure 18 on page 50 You install the PIMs into the midplane from the fro
65. e ls sia dese 61 4 Port Past EtherrietePIM utei enn et rt t aa p E t ted idol 62 4 PortISDN BRIPIMS ae ret vec pese pede e rp tea e co RM veo aee dian 65 E DOE 64 G SHDSLPIM deed die e qe eee uper te aede e eh Eet ee dats 66 Avaya VolP Module Sars iet esee es te Erates reb o uestes sot ratae he ads ceba 67 Avaya VoIP Module Summary ioir i eito i EErEE eee 67 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module 69 TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module 73 viii W Table of Contents Table of Contents TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 74 TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Modules tenendusi 75 Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview 79 User Intertace OVervIe War qs debut tht has sede ef tege ote aba teint seres 79 JEW EDS OVERVIEW cio octets ee Pert eee Loi e ee et 79 E De sciet O Re RR E 80 Before You EE 80 Using the WED InterfaCe aria dan e RU aee e M nere nte tens 81 Starting the J Web Interface AAA 81 EE ER Elements of the J Web Interface sssssssssss narcos 85 TOP PANE Elements de essit t estate ot test ota a t iode desde 85 Main Pane Ele merits ere sei tte Pe bte d eet aang ad pedi e 84 Side Pane Elements etiem ro tome e es he eicere ET 85 Navigating the J Web Interface sssssssssssss eem 85 Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages onnnninnnconiiccnnnnnccccinnnnno 86 Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor eccerre 86 Getting Wep Helps eret eret EPOR P OR RSS 87 W amp b SesSIOTIS ca sette re eene t prie ETC
66. en posici n de Apagado OFF Varning Innan du utf r n gon av f ljande procedurer m ste du kontrollera att str mf rs rjningen till likstr mskretsen r bruten Kontrollera att all str mf rs rjning ar BRUTEN genom att sla AV det versp nningsskydd som skyddar likstr mskretsen och tejpa fast versp nningsskyddets omkopplare i FR N l get DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit The grounding conductor must be permanently connected to earth For further information see Chassis Grounding on page 121 and DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 108 WARNING When installing the router the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdist minen aina tehtava ensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi Attention Lors de l installation de l appareil la mise la terre doit toujours tre connect e en premier et d connect e en dernier Warnung Der Erdanschlu amp mu bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt und zuletzt abgetren
67. ereere 257 E1 trunk ports TIM510 GESCHIPLION ets cas cte tod Sae eee Pei siete cdot 75 Ill EI 245 E1 T1 media module See TIM510 E3 ports BNC connector PINQUES ireen tea 240 LEE DIE aaa Ai a 59 LEE ON 60 earth ground See grounding earthquakes rack mount requirements 105 seismic require MentS ooocconnccococococccccnnnnnnnnnnnninno 104 EIA 550A DCE cable poinours uann ea 251 EIA 550A DTE cable poinours n arnisn ie iint 250 electrical specifications ti dettes tris 106 electricity Safety WANNE s eoe che idet s tee ote ts wiring guidelines electromagnetic compatibility EMC See EMC electromagnetic interference EMI See See EMI electrostatic bag for storing components 249 electrostatic discharge preventing 249 elements WED a be t pale eer es 85 EMC electromagnetic compatibility compliance with reoulrerments 280 preventing problems with 106 standard e tere dete o ets 279 Index m 293 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide EMI electromagnetic interference compliance with reguitrements 280 Standards eee eerta teet ed 9 SUDDressing non nono no ncnnnnnnnn ns 106 encrypted access through HTTPS rud berto dirt 151 A it bel e tha eerie tfe 154 through SE s pee ceci erede tci espere 151 environment CLI displaying e aite n reste EQ OY PEE s 95 GE LA 95 environmental requirements for operation 104 ePIMs 4 Port Fast Ethernet e
68. fixamente para orificios que se encontrarem a descoberto WARNING jAtenci n Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiaci n invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiaci n Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Varning Osynlig str lning kan avges fr n en port ppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du bor d rf r undvika att bli utsatt for stralning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade ppningar Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings As you maintain the Services Router observe the following guidelines and warnings m Battery Handling Warning on page 273 m Jewelry Removal Warning on page 274 m Lightning Activity Warning on page 276 m Operating Temperature Warning on page 277 m Product Disposal Warning on page 278 Battery Handling Warning A WARNING Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions A WARNING Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant aanbevolen is Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften weggewo
69. following sample output displays the sample values configured in Table 57 on page 146 Your output displays the values you set system host name routera domain name lab router net domain search lab router net router net backup router 192 168 2 44 time zone America Los Angeles root authentication ssh rsa ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac rootGroutera lab router net name server 10 148 2 32 services ntp server 10 148 2 21 interfaces ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address 192 168 1 1 24 loO unit O family inet address 172 16 1 24 32 What It Means The output shows the configuration of basic connectivity Verify that the values displayed are correct for your Services Router See Also For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations m 149 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 150 1H Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access You can manage a Services Router remotely through the J Web interface To communicate with the router the J Web interface uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP HTTP allows easy Web access but no encryption The data that is transmitted between the Web browser and the router by means of HTTP is vulnerable to interception and at
70. gt bb WARNING Varning Slutlig kassering av denna produkt b r sk tas i enlighet med landets alla lagar och f reskrifter Agency Approvals The Services Router complies with the following standards m Safety m CAN CSA 22 2 No 60950 1 03 UL 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment m EN 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment m EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Part 1 Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide m EMC J2320 and J2350 m AS NZS 3548 Class A Australia New Zealand m EN 55022 Class A Emissions Europe m FCC Part 15 Class A USA m VCCI Class A Japan Agency Approvals m 279 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m FCC Part 68 m Industry Canada CS 03 m EMC 4320 and J6350 m AS NZS 3548 Class B Australia New Zealand m EN 55022 Class B Emissions Europe m FCC Part 15 Class B USA m VCCI Class B Japan m FCC Part 68 m Industry Canada CS 03 m Immunity m EN 61000 3 2 Power Line Harmonics m EN 61000 3 3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker m EN 61000 4 2 ESD EN 61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity m EN 61000 4 4 EFT m EN 61000 4 5 Surge EN 61000 4 6 Low Frequency Common Immunity m EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips and Sags m ETSI m ETSI EN 300386 2 Telecommunication Network Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements Lithium Battery Batter
71. ie dude 88 Using the Command Line Interface sirita teni tentat eben detta e dated 89 CLI Command Hierarchy ssi eee rere ear iter ies le n eege 89 Starine the o 90 CLL Operational Mode ios d eee ee EE de ed etg 90 CLISCOMMBULATION MOUS ettet e et e t ap E t ted oett ee 91 CLI BASICS DE 92 Editing eystrOReS sis curtis eR retia e e RH 92 Command Completion este ag He espe t aos 95 AS eeneg Dette etae tt as 94 Configuring the CLI Environment 95 Part 2 Installing a Services Router Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation 101 Generalssitexauidelifi6s sere irc tette edere date dob edant ehe ute 101 Rack Requirements 5 dba er wee tese eet adel benda de 102 Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers s c 102 Rack Size and Strength for J4550 and J6350 Routers oes 105 Connection to Building Structure 2 0 0 etini Aata sd ies Aaea rnas 103 Router Environmental Tolerances nenie hee dte oo das 104 Fire Safety Requirements Senine ddaa a A aeda 104 Fire SUuppr ssloTi remitir a oen Peter te ted t oed deren 104 Fire Suppression Equipment sssssss nn noni ninas 105 Table of Contents W ix J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Chapter 6 Chapter 7 x Table of Contents Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications sssssssssss 105 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines cs terere etre 106 Signaling ant e 106 Radio Frequency Interference onrada e dee etes da 106 Elec
72. in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed For information about connecting to DC power sources see Connecting Power on page 122 9 Dress the power cables appropriately Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on it Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing Power System Components m 199 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 92 Installing a DC Power Supply EN EE EE KS E X SEE Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The Crypto Module is an optional feature on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers Figure 93 on page 200 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module on J2320 and J2350 routers Figure 93 Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J2320 and J2350 Routers Front Crypto Accelerator Module 9004113
73. in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures m Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna m Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver m Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected m Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules On the product is a label that contains the FCC registration number for this device If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details If this device causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required The telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved The telephone c
74. is online Unlit Off Port is offline J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 35 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 15 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs continued Function Color State Description TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving data Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving data Console Port You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing Engine through an RJ 45 serial cable From the chassis console port you can use the CLI to configure the router The console port is configured as data terminal equipment DTE and supports the RS 252 EIA 252 standard For information about securing the chassis console port see the J series Services Router Administration Guide For pinout information see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 256 AUX Port The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J4550 or J6350 Services Router is for future use and is not activated USB Port The USB ports on the front panel of the router see Figure 19 on page 32 accept a USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with a compact flash installed as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association When a USB storage device is installed and configured it automatically acts as a secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending
75. later Slots 1 through 6 fe 1 0 0 PIM Ports 0 and 1 4 port Fast Ethernet JUNOS 8 0 and later Can be installed in any fe 3 0 0 ePIM PIM high speed slot as follows m J4350 Slots 3 and 6 Ports 0 through 3 m J6350 Slots 2 3 5 and 6 Ports 0 through 3 4 Port ISDN BRI PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 br 1 0 2 Ports 0 1 2 and 3 ADSL PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 at 2 0 0 Port 0 G SHDSL PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 at 1 0 0 Ports 0 and 1 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are supported on J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6550 Services Routers Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are available in four versions The 1 port and 6 port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIM shown in Figure 22 on page 50 and Figure 25 on page 50 have small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers to allow you to use different connectors The optical SFP transceivers supported by these uPIMs are described in Table 22 on page 52 Field Replaceable PIMs m 49 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 22 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM The 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs shown in Figure 24 on page 50 and Figure 25 on page 50 have RJ 45 connectors Figure 24 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 9002383 50 HN Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Features Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs provi
76. local and remote bit error rate test BERT and T5 far end alarm and control FEAC diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for T5 and E3 PIMs see E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout on page 240 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 28 on page 60 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 28 Status LEDs for T3 and E3 Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure Yellow On steadily m Loopback mode T3 DS5 Remote endpoint is in red alarm failure m E3 Remote defect indication RDI Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM The Dual Port 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet PIM Figure 34 on page 61 has two physical Fast Ethernet ports Figure 34 Fast Ethernet PIM 9002326 The Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM provides the following key features Onboard network processor Full duplex and half duplex modes Media access control MAC address filtering Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet PIMs see Fast Ethernet RJ 4
77. located on the right side of the PIM when the PIM is horizontally oriented as it would be installed in the router The exact location might be slightly different on different PIMs depending on the placement of components on the PIM board Power Supply Serial Number Labels The power supplies installed in the J6350 Services Router are field replaceable Each power supply has a unique serial number The serial number label is located on the top of the power supply Contacting Customer Support After you have located the serial numbers of the components you need to return contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC in one of the following ways You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day seven days a week m On the Web using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support m By telephone From the US and Canada 1 888 314 JTAC 218 HN Contacting Customer Support Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware From all other locations 1 408 745 9500 If contacting JTAC by telephone enter your 11 digit case number followed by the pound key if this is an existing case or press the star key to be routed to the next available support engineer Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC Return Procedure When requesting support from JTAC by telephone be prepared to provide the following information m Your existing case number if you have one m Details of the failure or problem
78. management device manually or connect ge 0 0 0 to the management network and access the router another way for example through the console port 5 To check the configuration see Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations on page 149 Table 55 Set Up Quick Configuration Summary Field Function Your Action Identification Host Name required Defines the hostname of the router Type the hostname Domain Name Defines the network or subnetwork that the machine belongs to Type the domain name Root Password required Sets the root password that user root can use to log in to the router Type a plain text password that the system encrypts NOTE After a root password has been defined it is required when you log in to the J Web user interface or the CLI Verify Root Password required Verifies the root password has been typed correctly Retype the password Time Time Zone Identifies the time zone that the router is located in From the list select the appropriate time zone NTP Servers Specify an NTP server that the router can reach to synchronize the system time To add an IP address type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add To delete an IP address click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration m 143 J2320 J2350 J4350 and
79. must perform the initial Services Router configuration described in Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 129 After the initial configuration you use your username and password and the hostname or IP address of the router to start the user interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Using the J Web Interface This section contains the following topics Starting the J Web Interface on page 81 J Web Layout on page 82 Elements of the J Web Interface on page 85 Navigating the J Web Interface on page 85 J Web Sessions on page 88 For more information about using the J Web interface see the J Web Interface User Guide Starting the J Web Interface To start the J Web interface 1 Launch your HTTP enabled or HTTPS enabled Web browser To use HTTPS you must have installed a certificate on the Services Router and enabled HTTPS Li NOTE If the Services Router is running the worldwide version of the JUNOS Internet software and you are using the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser you must disable the Use SSL 3 0 option in the Web browser to access the Services Router After http or https in your Web browser type the hostname or IP address of the Services Router and press Enter The J Web login page appears On the login page type your username and password and click Log In To correct or change the username or password you typed click Reset type the new entry or entries and cli
80. on the size of the USB storage device you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring a USB storage device see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net J4350 Power System 36 m The 4550 Services Router uses either AC or DC power The autosensing power supply see Figure 14 on page 28 or Figure 16 on page 29 distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC input 48 VDC and return and requires a dedicated 15 A 48 VDC circuit breaker J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview The J4350 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED The J4350 DC powered chassis includes a power supply LED located to the upper right of the power supply connector Table 16 on page 57 describes the power supply LED Table 16 Power Supply LED State Description Off No power is flowing to the power supply Green Power supply is connected and power is flowing Yellow Po
81. on page 211 m Troubleshooting Power Management on page 212 m Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 214 Chassis Alarm Conditions Table 64 Chassis Alarm You can monitor alarms to troubleshoot hardware problems on a Services Router Alarms alert you to conditions on the router chassis or in the system software that might prevent the router from operating normally You can monitor active alarms from the J Web interface or the CLI Services Router alarms warn you about conditions that can prevent the router from operating normally Chassis and system alarm conditions are preset When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition it lights the ALARM LED on the front panel When the condition is corrected the light turns off To view a more detailed description of the alarm cause issue the show chassis alarms CLI command user host gt show chassis alarms Table 64 on page 211 describes alarms that can occur for a chassis component such as the Routing Engine or a Physical Interface Module PIM Conditions and Corrective Actions Component Alarm Conditions Corrective Action Alarm Severity Alternative boot media The Services Router boots from Typically the router boots from the Yellow minor an alternative boot device internal compact flash If you configured your router to boot from an alternative boot device ignore this alarm condition If you did not configure the router to b
82. on page 66 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary 46 Table 19 on page 47 provides software release information port numbers and sample interface names for the field replaceable PIMs supported on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers The supported PIMs can be installed in any slot available on the J2320 and J2350 routers CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J2320 or J2350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 110 Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview es NOTE Although J2320 and J2350 Services Routers support PIMs that were introduced before the JUNOS 8 4 release these routers do not support software releases earlier than JUNOS 8 4 Table 19 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary Supported Software Releases Sample Interface Name PIM for This PIM Port Numbering type pim 0 port 1 Port SFP 6 Port SFP JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports ge 2 0 0 8 Port and 16 Port o Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs i m Othrough 5 m Othrough 7 m Othrough 15 Dual Port Serial PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and
83. one power supply connection All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely WARNING Waarschuwing Deze J6550 eenheid heeft meer dan n stroomtoevoerverbinding alle verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid volledig te verwijderen WARNING Varoitus T ss laitteessa on useampia virtal hdekytkent j Kaikki kytkenn t on irrotettava kokonaan jotta virta poistettaisiin t ysin laitteesta WARNING Attention Cette J6350 unit est quip e de plusieurs raccordements d alimentation Pour supprimer tout courant lectrique de l unit tous les cordons d alimentation doivent tre d branch s WARNING Warnung Diese J6550 Einheit verf gt ber mehr als einen Stromanschluf um Strom g nzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten m ssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein WARNING Avvertenza Questa J6550 unit ha pi di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico tutte le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l elettricit dall unit Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 259 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 260 m WARNING Advarsel Denne J6550 enheten har mer enn n stremtilkobling Alle tilkoblinger m kobles helt fra for eliminere strom fra enheten WARNING Aviso Este J6550 dispositivo possui mais do que uma conex o de fonte de alimentac o de energia para
84. operations or capabilities or provide throughput performance configuration bandwidth interface processing temporal or geographical limits In addition such limits may restrict the use of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software Customer s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses d For any trial copy of the Software Customer s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download installation or use of the Software Customer may operate the Software after the 50 day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so Customer may not extend or create an additional trial period by re installing the Software after the 50 day trial period e The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer s enterprise network Specifically service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software to support any commercial network access services The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable license s for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller 4 Use Prohibitions Notwithstanding the foregoing the license provided herein
85. page 151 m Time Zone and System Time on page 151 m Network Settings on page 152 m Default Gateway on page 152 m Backup Router on page 152 m Loopback Address on page 152 m Built In Ethernet Interface Address on page 133 m Management Access on page 155 Router Identification The domain name defines the network or subnetwork that the Services Router belongs to The hostname refers to the specific machine while the domain name is shared 130 HH Basic Connectivity Overview Root Password Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity among all the devices in a given network Together the hostname and domain name identify the router in the network The root user has complete privileges to configure the Services Router and manage files in the router s file system Initially the root password is not defined on the router To ensure basic security you must define the root password during initial configuration If a root password is not defined you cannot commit configuration settings to take effect on the router If you use a plain text password the router displays the password as an encrypted string so that users viewing the configuration cannot easily see the password The root password must meet the following conditions m The password must be at least 6 characters long m Youcan include most character classes in a password alphabetic numeric and special characters except control characters m Valid passwords m
86. page 195 m Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 196 m Removing a DC Power Supply on page 197 m Installing a DC Power Supply on page 198 Replacing AC Power Supply Cords To replace the AC power cord for a redundant power supply Replacing Power System Components m 193 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 1 Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your geographical location see AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 107 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 5 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off D NOTE If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Services Router you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply 4 Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle 5 Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate 6 Insert the appliance coupler end of the replacement power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate 7 Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source receptacle ES NOTE Each power supply mus
87. party software may be provided with the Software and is subject to the accompanying license s if any of its respective owner s To the extent portions of the Software are distributed under and subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such portions publicly available such as the GNU General Public License GPL or the GNU Library General Public License LGPL Juniper will make such source code portions including Juniper modifications as appropriate available upon request for a period of up to three years from the date of distribution Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 ATTN General Counsel You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http www gnu org licenses gpl html and a copy of the LGPL at http www gnu org licenses Igpl html 15 Miscellaneous This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles The provisions of the U N Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement For any disputes arising under this Agreement the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of and venue in the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County California This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the Software and supersedes all prior and
88. replace 180 183 replacing rotating fans warning 181 184 compliance EMG requirermJents x oo ette reti 280 general Standarde 2 eee eleme d 279 lithium battery i aon i bdo re tres 273 components packing for shipment E 221 replacin enge tee eb ela iae bates Deh es 175 serial number Jabel 215 216 tro bleshooting u tei ttti eet entretiens 211 See also LEDs configuration clearing with RESET CONFIG button 22 55 factory resetting with RESET CONFIG buttona 5 cete pte e e cet gr e nas 22 55 root password reguirement 131 configuration editor See CLI configuration editor J Web configuration editor configuration hierarchy J Web display 85 configuration mode eines a 91 prompt Aitana ddr dae 91 connection so mm 122 DC POWER EE fias ied E 124 for managetnent ed cedo teet edes 129 network Gebees 2 ede re trei 121 tO ServICes ROULOr cese een ere tert 155 connectivity basic See basic connectivity Hard Ware iaa pai 115 modem remote Connecton 139 regaining lost DHCP lease after initial CON rodeo through Web through the CLI locally through the CLI remotely console port adapter Chassis 3 d ot t eee adapter TGM550 eue peret dens auxiliary console port connecting through the CLI locally 137 connecting through the CLI remotely 159 descripta 23 36 292 m Index
89. system components Replacing the Console Port Cable Replacing a PIM Removing a PIM The RJ 45 port labeled CONSOLE on the Services Router s front panel allows you to connect the router to an external management device such as a laptop or a terminal server For cable specifications see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 236 To replace the console port cable 1 Locate an appropriate replacement cable and connector 2 Plugthe Ethernet connector at either end of the cable into the console port on the front panel see Figure 66 on page 158 and Figure 67 on page 159 5 Plug the connector at the other end of the cable into the external management device If you are connecting to a DB 9 serial port use the provided RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter To remove or install field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs in a Services Router you must first power off the router This section contains the following topics m Removing a PIM on page 174 m Installing a PIM on page 176 The PIMs are installed in the front of the Services Router A PIM weighs less than 1 Ib 0 5 kg 174 1H Replacing the Console Port Cable Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components A CAUTION Do not hot swap PIMs Failure to power off the router before removing m or installing a PIM might result in damage to the hardware Figure 71 Removing a PIM Captive screws To remove a PIM see Figure 71 on page 175 1 Plac
90. the carton Pull out the packing material holding the router in place Verify the contents of the carton against the packing list included with the router Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you later need to move or ship the router Unpacking a J series Services Router Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers AN WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location You can center mount or front mount the J2320 and J2350 Services Routers in a rack In general a center mount rack is preferable to a front mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center mount rack provides greater stability Many types of racks are acceptable including four post telco racks enclosed cabinets and open frame racks For more information about the type of rack or cabinet the J series router can be installed into see Rack Requirements on page 102 WARNING If you are installing multiple routers in one rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward in the rack Install heavier routers in the lower part of the rack The router must be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack WARNING The J2320 and J2350 chassis weighs between 14 8 lb 6 7 kg and 18 2 Ib 8 3 kg Read and follow the lifting guidelines in Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 263
91. the center or the front Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater stability Figure 55 Installing the Mounting Brackets 9008860 N N 2 Attach a screw to each rack rail in the third hole down from where you want the top of the router to be positioned Screw only part way in leaving about Y in 6 mm distance between the screw head and the rail see Figure 56 on page 120 Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers m 119 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 56 Attaching Center Screw to the Rack Rail hos o 2 s Seen TZ g placed in center hole Dm 1RU rack unit measurement 9003861 5 Lift the router and insert the larger elliptical openings in the mounting brackets onto the partially inserted screws so that the router is hanging from the two screws see Figure 57 on page 120 Figure 57 Hanging the Router in the Rack Front view Ral Front mounting bracket Center screw Elliptical hanger cutout 9003862 4 Verify that the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level 5 Install at least two mounting screws into each mounting bracket in addition to the center screws from which the router hangs see Figure 58 on page 121 Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws 120 m Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers
92. the compact flash slot cover Gently grasp the compact flash and slide it out of the compact flash slot see Figure 77 on page 182 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers M 181 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 77 Removing the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash Slide internal compact flash out of the compact flash slot PIM card cage Chassis front Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards the router insert the new compact flash into the compact flash slot see Figure 78 on page 182 Figure 78 Inserting the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash Insert the new compact flash in the internal compact flash slot PIM card cage Chassis front Replace the compact flash slot cover Tighten the pan head screws that secure the compact flash slot cover Slide the chassis cover onto the chassis Replace the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 Replace the power cable Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 182 Mm Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers The inter
93. 00Base LX Transceiver Maximum distance 500 m 1640 ft on 50 125 um 10 km 6 2 mi on 9 125 um SMF MME cable cable 200 m 656 ft on 62 5 125 um 550 m 1894 ft on MMF cable MME cable Transmitter wavelength 830 nm through 860 nm 1270 nm through 1355 nm 54 mW Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 24 Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM continued Parameter 1000Base SX Transceiver 1000Base LX Transceiver Average launch power 9 5 dBm through 4 dBm For SMF cable 9 5 dBm through 5 dBm For MMF cable 11 5 dBm through 5 dBm Receiver saturation 5 dBm 5 dBm Receiver sensitivity 18 dBm 20 5 dBm Dual Port Serial PIM The Dual Port Serial PIM Figure 28 on page 55 provides a physical connection to serial network media types through two serial interface ports Figure 28 Dual Port Serial PIM 9002329 The Dual Port Serial PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m Autoselection of operation modes based on data terminal equipment DTE or data communication equipment DCE cables m Local and remote loopback diagnostics m Configurable clock rate for the transmit Tx clock and receive Rx clock For pinouts of cable connectors for serial PIMs see Serial PIM Cable Specifications on page 225 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 25 on pa
94. 1 On the main Configuration page next to From the edit system hierarchy level enter specify the SSL certificate System click Configure or Edit to be used for set services web management https authentication 2 Selec the Services check box and click local certificate new port 8443 Edit next to it Specify the port on which 3 Next to Web management click Edit HTTPS access is to be j enabled for example TCP 4 Selec the Https check box and click Edit port 8445 next to it 5 Inthe Local certificate box type the name NOTE You can chase of the certificate for example new HTTPS access on specified interfaces also If you 6 In the Port box type 8443 enable HTTPS without 7 Click OK specifying an interface HTTPS is enabled on all interfaces Verifying Secure Web Access To verify that the Services Router has the secure access settings you configured perform the following tasks Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration on page 158 Displaying a Secure Access Configuration on page 159 Verifying Secure Web Access BM 157 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration Purpose Display the SSL certificate configuration Action From the J Web interface select Configuration gt View and Edit gt View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show security command The following sample output di
95. 11 hardwareko menini en Auger eet ue gegart 211 dial up modem connection See modem connection to router console port DID online ee 74 digital certificate See SSL certificates digital subscriber line See ADSL SHDSL DIMMs dual inline memory modules See DRAM modules direct inward dialing on line porte 74 RIES 162 DNS Domain Name System 152 DNS server defining configuration editort 147 defining Quick Configuration FUNCION EE documentation set comments on domain rame eios eee defining configuration editort 146 defining Quick Configuratont 145 See also DNS server Domain Name Gvstem 152 Index domain search defining configuration dito 147 defining Quick Configuration downloading licenses WED d ide and 165 DRAM modules installing aet egt teet ette et bes 192 LOCATOR neo osten d ert qe en tte eter 190 E le EE 191 dry chemical fire extinguishers prohibited 105 DS1 ports See E1 ports T1 ports DS3 ports See E3 ports T5 ports DSL See ADSL SHDSL dual inline memory modules See DRAM modules Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 BIN ECKE 56 Dual Port ES PIM S oci AMO eee URN Smeets s 59 Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 61 D alPoft EEN EE 55 D al Port TA PIM za tete e te federa 56 D al Port T3 PIM init rt Reo eere 59 E E1 ports ESCAPA ee ERR teed 56 See also channelized E1 ports LED State See A n a e Ee OE he 57 RJ 48 cable pinours
96. 2 Services Router Avaya VoIP module overview 67 ELE eso e e pides 132 Clearance de ie Nee tle asthe iet ehe 101 CONNECTE ia 155 establishing secure Web accesg 151 establishing software connectivity 129 grounding a DC powered model 125 grounding an AC powered model 122 Hard Wale ue eem teg hardware replacement hardware return HTTPS Web access installation and connection T liCeriseSu 25 ous old EN network cables and connectors sssss 225 operating Grvirormment cnnccnccococannnnnononononnnnnss 104 EEN 3 7 packing for sbigpmenmt 220 NOR esce tt pire pet tb tee naan 45 powering on and oft 127 preparation checklisEz ue eoe 112 safety and compliance 245 Site PLEPALALON a au odere erepti a dn 101 SOLEWALS So ss ts eoe tta de dece de eei as 39 GEES 151 UNPACKING ss ose pier ERI CHEER eR URN 116 user interfaces See user interfaces SESSIONS JEM ai ae d eet er eet 88 set lU AS dier gen ecce ese vi mese ree 95 Set Up page GCESCLIDHOM Cis ee a 141 ELA summary e ee oce titt da Een 145 setup configuration editor Quick Configuration 5 FeQulrermenhts iv eee ee eo id SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs optical interface support 54 OVERVIEWS acad cef ote tee ie orte dde oet 52 SEPS S ppoELed i id debite Ad SC pereo 55 304 m Index SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs optical interface support 52 overview 49 SHDSL ports CESGTIPUIOM aes eoe ed
97. 267 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 268 m m Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado comenzar la instalaci n desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo m s pesado en la parte inferior m Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores instalar stos antes de montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor WARNING Varning For att undvika kroppsskada nar du installerar eller utf r underh llsarbete pa denna enhet pa en st llning m ste du vidta s rskilda forsiktighetsatgarder f r att f rs kra dig om att systemet star stadigt F ljande riktlinjer ges f r att trygga din s kerhet m Juniper Networks router m ste installeras i en stallning som ar f rankrad i byggnadens struktur m Om denna enhet ar den enda enheten p st llningen skall den installeras l ngst ned p st llningen m Om denna enhet installeras pa en delvis fylld st llning skall st llningen fyllas nedifr n och upp med de tyngsta enheterna l ngst ned p st llningen w Om st llningen r f rsedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten installeras eller underh lls p st llningen Ramp Warning WARNING When installing the router do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10 degrees Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden Varoitus l k yt sellai
98. 320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 58 Figure 31 Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 9002377 The Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM provides the following key features Onboard network processor Two port channelization Interfaces that are software configurable as T1 or E1 channels or ISDN PRI B channels Clear channel fractional and channelized operation Lower latency due to the addition of a Freescale processor Maximum MTU value of 4500 bytes for channelized T1 or E1 interface and 4098 bytes for ISDN PRI services oe NOTE For a clear channel T1 or El interface the maximum MTU is 9150 bytes 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps modes ANSI T1 102 T1 107 and T1 405 standards compliance G 703 G 704 and G 706 El standards compliance Independent internal and external clocking system Loopback bit error rate test BERT T1 facilities data link FDL and long buildout diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIMs see ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 241 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI LEDs indicate PIM and port status Table 27 on page 59 describes the meaning of the LED states eS NOTE The STATUS LED displays channelized T1 or E1 port activity and alarms only It does not display ISDN PRI B channel or D channel status Field Replaceable PIMs T3 or E3 PIM Chapter 3 PIM
99. 320 and J2350 DRAM Location Front 9004111 DRAM 2 pairs 190 1H Replacing DRAM Modules Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 87 J4350 and J6350 DRAM Location Slot 1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot 4 L p Es D a Uf oo an swosow buno Of WWW o 0 B zn O El zu p IIl 9 X a a 3290 SS og oo a CH 0 o B i Q 5 BBC O pm o o a 2 Ls SA z gt z l CEPA 3 i e DRAM 2 pairs 3 IS Rear To modify the DRAM configuration use the following procedures Removing a DRAM Module on page 191 Installing a DRAM Module on page 192 Removing a DRAM Module To remove a DRAM module 1 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see the Getting Started Guide for your rou
100. 40 J4350 types supported iriiri eniai 47 Avaya VoIP modules 241 J6350 types supported eem 47 chassis console DB 9 connector 24257 LINE and TRUNK on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 chassis Console pott redu s 256 eg E 152 EIA 550A DCE serial cable 231 serial See serial ports EIA 550A DTE serial cables cists sum 250 SHDSL See SHDSL ports Fast Ethernet Copnpector oa 255 T1 See T1 ports Gigabit Ethernet connector ePIM 256 T3 See T5 ports Gigabit Ethernet connector uPIMS 255 telephone and trunk on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 ISDN RJ 45 COMTECLO trt t 241 TGM550 4 inert oto ro te maa seers cette tds 69 RJ 45 chassis console connector 256 TM5 RE 75 RJ 45 TGM550 console connector 241 RER 74 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector TIMS2 T ute i A lots dete tbv d ee 76 crossover EE 239 US Bao EEN 24 36 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector power straight See 259 AC power See AC power RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector APP Binter 127 crossover ET POTE 258 Le IEN 20 55 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector CONNECTIONS cia iria e 122 StralgliD oia pinga c 238 consumption PIMS dirimir 110 RS 232 DCE S rial cable rtt Nt 227 DC power See DC power RS 232 DTE serial cable 226 grounding reouirement i 121 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE serial cable 229 BE
101. 5 Connector Pinout on page 255 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Fast Ethernet LEDs indicate link status port speed and activity Table 29 on page 61 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 29 LEDs for Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM Label Color State Description LINK SPEED Green 100 Mbps On steadily Online and link is active Yellow 10 Mbps Red Disconnected Link is unavailable ACTIVITY Green Blinking Online with network traffic Green On steadily Online without traffic For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Field Replaceable PIMs m 61 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 62 You can install 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in any of the high speed slots as follows m J4350 Install up to two 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 3 and 6 m J6350 Install up to four 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2 5 5 and 6 NOTE For 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs if you apply a CoS scheduler map on outgoing egress traffic the router does not divide the bandwidth appropriately among the CoS queues As a workaround configure enforced CoS shaping on the ports The 4 Port 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet ePIM shown in Figure 55 on page 62 has four physical Fast Ethernet ports Figure 35 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM The 4 Port Fast Ethernet eP
102. 5 Preparing for Router Installation The 2520 chassis height of 1 75 in 4 45 cm equals 1 U The J2350 chassis height of 2 61 in 6 65 cm equals 1 5 U Each U is a standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers The Services Router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either of the following standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m A600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard for equipment practice document numbers ETS 500 119 1 through 119 4 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the router s mounting ears which measure 19 in 48 2 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis s external dimensions 5 44 in 8 74 cm high 17 44 in 44 5 cm wide and 21 15 in 55 67 cm deep The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chas
103. 5 management dCCess oo ca Ce ENN Ph 152 verifying SSL configuration 157 SSL 5 0 option disabling on Internet Explorer for worldwide version of JUNOS software 81 SSL certificates adding configuration editort ees 157 adding Quick Configuration 155 generada dee 155 sample Conftguration 158 verifying SSL conftguration 157 standards ormpliance s deo aprende 279 startup J Web Interface JUNGS ELL aisen ten SerVICes ROULET ei aed e te b standby Dower sess statements configuration types status license Keynote tede setius 164 O T 21 54 See also STATUS LEDs Index STATUS LEDs AD SE DODS ok tea Vr M ida ir eod ee LACUS channelized E1 ports channelized T1 ports EV DOFPSSa esentium ESPOSA dO Eie e tea Ms a er AUR ISDN POr 3 255 etr id out ite Nace tdt dat POULEL SEALS eet oui leone t rm ed e dite Serial POPES Z deco messe Te ertet petendo terns es SHDSL POMS size a vto ete Tires E IPod TA Let storage media replacing the external compact flash 186 replacing the internal compact flash 180 185 replacing the USB storage device 188 support technical See technical support SX transceiver Gigabit Ethernet EIN cer eph ee 54 Gigabit Ethernet oPIM a nR 52 symmetric high speed digital subscriber line See SHDSL syntax COnV6ehtiOris tette rash Pret xvii system overview hardware SOPtWATE a sic lirica nage system tim
104. 50 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 42 m Software Overview For more information see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 79 Other user interfaces for the Services Router interact with the management process through the common API interface These interfaces are designed to facilitate the configuration of one or in some cases many routers on the network Among the supported interfaces are the JUNOScope and Session and Resource Control SRC applications For more information about these products see the JUNOScope Software User Guide and the SRC PE Getting Started Guide Chapter 3 PIM and VolP Module Overview J series Services Routers accept Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules in the slots on the front of the chassis A CAUTION PIMs and VoIP modules are not hot swappable You must power off the Services Router before removing or inserting a PIM or VoIP module Ensure that the PIMs and VoIP modules are installed in the router chassis before booting up the system A Physical Interface Module PIM is a network interface card that is installed on a J series Services Router to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The PIM receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the network Each PIM is equipped with a dedicated network processor that forwards incoming data packets to the Routing Engine and receives outgoing data packets from the Rou
105. 6 on page 16 and Figure 7 on page 17 You install the PIMs into the midplane from the front of the chassis Data packets are transferred across the midplane from the PIM to the Routing Engine and from the Routing Engine across the midplane to the destination PIM A time division multiplexing TDM bus in 2520 and J2350 routers provides support for the Avaya VoIP module TGM550 The TGM550 converts the voice path from the TDM bus to compressed or uncompressed and packetized VoIP on an Ethernet connection For more information see PIM and VoIP Module Overview on page 45 J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware 18 m The Routing Engine consists of the following components For more information see Software Overview on page 59 m Processor Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router s routing tables and routing protocols m DRAM Buffers incoming packets and provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes To view the amount of DRAM installed on your router issue the show chassis routing engine command m EPROM Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine To view the serial number of the Routing Engine issue either the show chassis routing engine command or the show chassis hardware command m Crypto Accelerator Module Processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP sec
106. 8 on page 65 over plain old telephone service POTS and the other Annex B Figure 59 on page 65 over ISDN includes one physical ADSL port for an ATM over ADSL connection 64 1m Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Figure 38 ADSL 2 24 Annex A PIM 9002333 9002332 The ADSL PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m ADSL ADSL2 and ADSL2 protocols on the same PIM m Dying gasp notification m Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 encapsulation For pinouts of cable connectors for ADSL PIMs see ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 1 1 Connector Pinout on page 240 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 The ADSL PIMs have two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its port Table 32 on page 65 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 32 LEDs for ADSL PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily PIM passed the self test and is online and operational Unlit Off PIM is offline STATUS Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with local or remote alarms The router has detected a failure Field Replaceable IMs m 65 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide G SHDSL PIM 66 For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide The G SHDS
107. A ELECTROSTATIC V J SENSITIVE d DEVICES DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE EXCEPT AT A STATIC FREE WORKSTATION Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings When working on equipment powered by electricity follow the guidelines described in the following sections m General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 250 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 251 Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 249 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 250 m m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 252 m Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies on page 252 m DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 255 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 254 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 255 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 256 m Grounded Equipment Warning on page 258 m Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 258 m In Case of Electrical Accident on page 259 m Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 259 m Power Disconnection Warning on page 260 m TN Power Warning on page 261 m Telecommunication Line Cord Warning on page 262 General Electrical Safety Guidelines m Install the Services Router in compliance with the following local national or international electrical codes m United States National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 United States National Electrical Code m Canada Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 CSA C22 1 m Other cou
108. Audience This preface provides the following guidelines for using the 2320 2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Objectives on page xv m Audience on page xv m How to Use This Guide on page xvi m Document Conventions on page xvii m Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii m Documentation Feedback on page xxi m Requesting Support on page xxi This guide contains an overview basic instructions and specifications for J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers It explains how to prepare your site for installation unpack and install a Services Router and its components power on the router install licenses and establish basic connectivity J series Services Router operations are controlled by the JUNOS Internet software You direct the JUNOS software through either a Web browser or a command ine interface CLI NOTE This guide documents Release 8 4 of the JUNOS software For additional information about J series Services Routers either corrections to or omissions from this guide see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net This guide is designed for anyone who installs and sets up a J series Services Router or prepares a site for Services Router installation The guide is intended for the following audiences m Customers with technical knowledge of and experience with networks and the Internet Objectives M XV J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 S
109. BS 1565A Figure 51 on page 108 illustrates the plug on the power cord for each country or region listed in Table 50 on page 108 Figure 51 AC Plug Types D y ex e er Australia China Europe Italy Japan North America UK 9001892 Ld NOTE Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on them For information about the AC power supply see J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 15 and J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 To connect the power cord during initial installation see Connecting Power on page 122 To replace the AC power cord see Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 195 and Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 196 DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications Each DC power supply has a single DC input 48 VDC and return that requires a dedicated circuit breaker 108 HN Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation m J2350 routers minimum 15 A 48 VDC m J4350 and J6350 routers minimum 25 A 48 VDC If the J6350 router contains redundant DC power supplies one power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed A and the other power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed B This configuration provides the commonly deployed A B feed redundancy for the system
110. C aed cok ee e ad ete 241 TGM550 console port RJ 45 connector elle 241 TIM510 E1 T1 pinouts eects 245 TIM514 analog pinouts eee 243 TIM521 ISDN BRI poinours eee 245 Canada compliance statement 281 Cancel button J Web configuration editor 87 Quick Configuration is case number Tor TACs 4 en became etta certificates See SSL certificates channelized Ed EIN uiis eee petere 5f channelized E1 ports ee ek ee sth as soe ette 57 LED States acti teen bed lat ie bett 59 RJ 48 cable oinours cece eeeeente ees 237 channelized T1 BIM ettet oett petu ee t tnb 57 Index channelized T1 ports descriptio Tto uo de de desee cadens LED States etes RJ 48 cable pinouts chassis alarm conditions and remedies 211 component serial number labels 215 216 cover replacing 2320 and J2550 178 dimensions t oco itte la t Perte 17 50 environmental oleramces 104 STOUN GING iss c et Regel S d rA OH HARE mene tae 121 leat dissIpatiOni qo dA e den eee 110 EE 14 A etie Hb tere ovii 14 JAS oom ex LLL EN RIN UA TET oA te 27 JOS 50 es tdv tents Lo bale 27 lifting eidele esi eee tte 265 PIM Slot riUumb6ers itio reote 20 55 power COnsUmbptlor eec eae rss 110 power management planning 110 power management troubleshooting 212 TACK requirertierits se e Men beber 102 WICKES syste oh ita 17 30 chassis software process ust edo e Re terea 40 ch
111. Compact Flash 9003834 ES NOTE On some Services Routers the compact flash is in a horizontal position If the compact flash connection is horizontal lay the compact flash behind the slot and slide it forward until it clicks into place 10 Slide the cover onto the chassis 11 Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers 8M 185 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 Replace the power cord or cable 15 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing External Compact Flashes 186 m The external compact flash is an optional component on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers It provides secondary storage for the router and can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode If the internal compact flash fails on startup the router boots from the external compact flash For information about configuring the external compact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE Depending on your configuration the Services Router might not have an external compact flash If no external compact flash is installed proceed directly to Step 10 to install the compact flash The external compact flash is installed in a slot on the rear of the J2320 or J2350 chassis To
112. D eet tiet eid RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE serial cable mor ri managing SHDSL RJ 11 connector ssssss 240 power cables See DC power cables TGM550 analog RJ 11 connector 242 power cords See AC power cords TGM550 console DB 9 connector sssss 241 power supplies See power supplies TGM550 Console port cct tede 241 power system See power system TIM510 E1 T1 BAR 245 EHNEN 127 TIM514 analog RJ 11 Connector 245 requiremerits as crasas dos eene 106 TIM521 ISDN BRI oorts isunen eais 245 troubleshooHrfg iet trente pipes 212 Nie DCESErial Cables e ett 255 power DUON 39 eas entree oett re aea ell Monete 20 55 V S5 DTE serial cable ero rg s 232 power cables See DC power cables X 21 DCE Serialicable ec toes 254 power cords See AC power cords 2621 DTE serial cable iu eer 255 POWER LED oro tia 20 55 PIU SIV DES AC eus stood ette tal 108 power management ports gll 110 D rie us A A EL LM 155 troubleshooting ea 2 eue eee e err 212 ADSL See ADSL ports power supplies ALPES mets eS M SR UE 25 56 12320 v ncn recu CN EE 24 cables PIM installing 177 2350555 oed e sd i m oer 24 cables WAN removing 177 ESA A Ere ASE EA EE ERSEN TUENTI ITEN 56 channelized See channelized E1 ports channelized J6350 See power supplies 6550 T1 ports BEER 37 console Chassis c ette tite adn amenities a 23 36 power supplies J6350 See also console port blank panel required in empty slot console TGM550 ctr tn
113. DN Ort StAtUs o itr itor trente qe ter peda 64 J4350 power supply sss 57 J6350 powWer SUpplys du oen i ttes 57 LAN port Statuses ipea redet dad 25 55 LINK sui den teet lec tt ts 25 55 54 link activity 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 65 link status 4 port ePIM sssssss 65 LINK SPEED status Dual Port Fast Ethernet PUM so aues ect et etr uer ps safety warnings serial port status SHDSL port status SIG Signali aii eieiei STATUS FOULGT isse SE E niece eite T1 port status T5 port status TEMIDO port Status eoe e e petens 72 IM Dk Status idet 74 TIM514 link Status iiss beoe deter ets 75 RIMS EL LINK Status redi teet ete 76 TST CESO cin etre tiec ae rne re teeta ed th 74 TAE ROS n siete eerte teta res ket be teta putida 25 55 54 license infringement identifying any licenses needed 64 verifying license usage 69 verifying licenses installed ee 68 license keys COIT DorHernts od Leda eed atodos 162 displaying CL sak eene tese tente 69 displaying Web 165 SEA UU Sos bts e eo tene 64 VEIS ota 164 licenses adding CD rs ch betae adding Web BGP route reflectors deleting CL deleting went E displaying CL 45322 i atari tits displaying J Web oe ttem displaying usage DES dist isset ots ciet eet edi tate eed cet tout downloading web 165 features requiring a licensen eee 7 gEOUD eee e e t t
114. Data A 37 7 38 Request to Send A 52 8 51 Receive Timing A 48 9 47 Clear to Send A 45 0 Local Loopback 33 1 34 Data Mode A 9 2 10 Terminal Ready A 13 3 14 Receive Ready A 5 7 6 Terminal Timing A 36 9 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 2 22 1 Send Data B 55 25 56 Send Timing B 59 24 60 Receive Data B 38 25 37 Request to Send B 51 26 52 Receive Timing B 47 27 48 Clear to Send B 34 29 33 Data Mode B 10 30 9 Terminal Ready B 14 31 13 Receiver Ready B 6 35 5 Terminal Timing B Se 37 Send Common 26 to 25 5 x Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 229 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinout Table 70 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 1 3 2 Receive Data A 48 4 47 Request to Send A 37 5 38 Clear to Send A 9 6 Data Set Ready A 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 6 9 5 Receive Clock B 14 10 13 Received Line Signal Detector B 51 11 52 Terminal Timing B 55 12 56 Transmit Clock B 58 15 57 Clear to Send B 59 14 60 Transmit Data B 56 15 55 Transmit Clock A 2 16 1 Receive Data B 5 17 6 Receive Clock A 41 18 Local Loopback 47 19 48 Request to Send B 55 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 25 Sign
115. E R I tat uteris e tide eter 64 lt gt in syntax descriptons xviii gt operational mode command Drompt 90 command for CLI online helpzasim eere tete reiege 94 in configuration Mode na date pe teet ttd 91 irtoperational MOE iia aida 90 CIE Seeks id deci Mer e E alk ker in configuration statements in configuration statements xviii pipe in syntax descriptions xviii A E s tete et ns POR D EOD Me etes 108 AC power connecting POWE sitet ptite teta 122 cords See AC power cords dedicated AC power feed requirement 196 electrical Specifications ccc ceret 107 grounding the router 122 installing a 6550 power supply 195 12 220 5 VSLG EE EE 24 12350 SYSTEM iris ep Padua Dates iube 24 EE E 56 A ares eds 57 removing a 6550 power supply 194 requlrements i eee eto sto eee teet t owe 106 safety guidelines etd ett eet 251 AC power cords electrical specfications 108 physical requirements plug types replacing tete accident steps to take eer et reete 259 enk HD 72 RRC RE 74 TIM DUA tuts Cette EE 75 TIM asa dt il 76 ACTIVITY LED Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 61 adapter console port CHASSIS A Es EO 137 140 TGM550 nne tritt eee tempe De qea etie 70 addresses ge 0 0 0 for autoipnstallatton 155 lGopDaCeR u s ttr e e pede 132 management Interface 155 ADSL PIM ee del LEE 64 PIM ONEINE EED it Rias oi
116. E ePIM 9 9 Ethernet ePIM 4 Port ISDN BRI JX 4BRI S S 4x BRI S T 4 4 S T PIM 4 Port ISDN BRIU JX 4BRI U S 4x BRI U 4 6 PIM ADSL 2 2 JX 1ADSL A S 1x ADSL Annex A 16 16 Annex A PIM 1 port for POTS ADSL 2 2 JX 1ADSL B S 1x ADSL Annex B 16 16 Annex B PIM 1 port for ISDN G SHDSL PIM JX 2SHDSL S 2x SHDSL ATM 9 10 2 port two wire mode or 1 port four wire mode TGM550 Avaya 1x TGM550 14 19 Telephony Gateway Module TIM510 E1 T1 Avaya 1x DS1 TIM510 6 6 Telephony Interface Module TIM514 Analog Avaya 4x FXS AxFXO 4 15 Telephony TIM514 Interface Module TIM521 BRI Avaya 4x BRI TIM521 3 3 Telephony Interface Module Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications m 1411 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 52 on page 112 lists the maximum power tokens and maximum heat tokens available for each model Table 52 Maximum Power and Heat Capacities of J series Models Model Power Capacity tokens Heat Capacity tokens J2320 50 50 J2350 83 83 J4350 100 100 J6350 100 100 Network Cable Specifications The Services Router supports interfaces that use various kinds of network cable For information about the type of cable used by each interface see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 ISDN Provisioning You might need a network termination type 1 NT1 device to connect your ISDN interface to the ISDN service Contact your service pro
117. Establishing Basic Connectivity The JUNOS software is preinstalled on the Services Router When the router is powered on it is ready to be configured If the router does not have a configuration from the factory or your service provider you must configure the software to establish basic connectivity If you are setting up a Services Router for the first time you can use either J Web Quick Configuration or a configuration editor to configure basic connectivity For a brief explanation of J Web Quick Configuration and the J Web and CLI configuration editors see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 79 If you are setting up many Services Routers autoinstallation can help automate the configuration process For more information about autoinstallation see the J series Services Router Administration Guide This chapter contains the following topics For more information about basic connectivity see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide m Basic Connectivity Terms on page 129 m Basic Connectivity Overview on page 150 m Before You Begin on page 154 m Connecting to a Services Router on page 155 m Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration on page 141 m Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor on page 145 m Verifying Basic Connectivity on page 148 Basic Connectivity Terms Before configuring basic connectivity become familiar with the terms defined in Table 54 on page 129 Table 54 Bas
118. Ethernet uPIMs can be inserted in any slot on J2320 J2350 J4350 or J6550 Services Routers Throughput for a uPIM is higher when it is inserted in a high speed slot High speed slots are slots 5 and 6 on the J4350 router and slots 2 5 5 and 6 on the J6550 router 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are two slots high Because the connector on the PIM is on the lower half the PIM occupies the slot that it is plugged into and the slot above it Thus you cannot install a 16 port uPIM in the top slots of a router For example on a 4550 router you cannot install a 16 port uPIM in slots 1 and 4 If you install the PIM in slot 2 it occupies both slots 2 and 1 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Interface LEDs For 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs the activity LED is located on the left side of each port and the link LED is located on the right side of each port For the 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM the LEDs are located to the right of each port with the link LED above the activity LED LEDs on the 1 port uPIM are clearly labeled Table 21 on page 52 describes the meaning of the LEDs Field Replaceable PIMs WM 51 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 21 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description Link Green On steadily Port is online Unlit off Port is offline Activity Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving traffic TX RX
119. G o eret erint dpt dere dte iu ares 261 Web access secure See secure access Web browser modifying Internet Explorer for worldwide version of JUNOS software 81 weight E EE 17 2350 s t te ee epe eet ege Suet 17 E 50 A ihsaan kaa e A E a A ae ENAREN 30 rack mount requirements 102 103 windows J Web unpredictable results with multiple ease tite ipei o P MOTO ed 88 wire gauge for grounding cables n accettate 121 for telecommunications mes 262 wiring guidelines DC wiring sequence warmtng ee 255 DC wiring terminations warning 256 radio frequency interference PI 106 Index signaling Ummitations 106 suppressing electromagnetic interference EE 106 working directory setting sse 96 X X 21 DCE cable piriOutsda ette orar eee e 254 X21 DTE cable e Le 255 Index m 307 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 308 m Index
120. I S T PIM 65 4 Port ISDN BRIU PIM uu iere thee atia 65 ADSL PIM ia 64 ait filter replacing ott bd 208 Avaya VOIP modules nein ete 67 boot devices 19 51 bo6t Seguente ode erg 51 IEEE EM 27 cooling Syste eis aE oed ote iege 38 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 DualBort E1 PIM ost e oet tank ete ERR ER 56 Dual Port Fast Ethernet DIN 61 Dual Port Serial BIR ege pide e pt cte ee 55 REISE GE WE EE 56 ES PIM Pueis tona ael a TE e petes 59 electrical specfications 107 PANS dtd ee dt ed an db qae diede EROS 58 front panels dove ata olet ut rie da 32 PRUSs replacing ci aa e de Ae ns 175 GiSHBSE Plot teret e gre TS 66 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM sssssssss 52 Gigabit Ethernet obPiMs ie e 49 SEET din yen eee 26 hardware COMPONEN S si taent iiinn 30 hardware replacing cue iaig as 175 le HE tee EE 118 interfaces supporter 47 mounting brackets installing ee 119 OVELVIEW Stach esit etes Pandora ete s b Batts 6 physical specftcationg 50 PIM OVOTVIE WE ria ti A 46 PIMs supported e 47 ports SUDDpOFted u ie tete hoa ter enge 47 power T nagerment na nnnnnnonos 110 power supplies See power supplies J6550 restricted access installation 25 57 58 118 Index m 297 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide TMST pt s eda edunt ete et TIM Aa esoo seta d Ri a Ae M Ede e eer USP OF tede aote ets e dob epe Japan comp
121. IM m Dual Port T1 PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m GSHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports m TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J2350 Services Router Overview The 2550 Services Router is primarily designed for regional or branch offices It has a chassis that is 1 5 U rack unit in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power supply an external compact flash and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J2350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory The memory on J2350 routers can be 4 W J2320 Services Router Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers upgraded to 1 GB For instructions on upgrading memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 190 Each J2350 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface The chassis also contains five slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules providing flexible WAN and voice connectivity options The J2350 Services Router support
122. IM provides the following key features m Full duplex and half duplex modes m Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet ePIMs see Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 255 NOTE 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs support a maximum frame size of 1514 bytes Jumbo frames are not supported For information about installing and removing a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Fast Ethernet LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 50 on page 65 describes the meaning of the LEDs Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 30 LEDs for 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM Label Color State Description Link status upper Green On steadily Port is online left Off Port is offline Link activity upper Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving right data Off Port might be online but it is not ransmitting or receiving data For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide 4 Port ISDN BRI PIMs The 4 port ISDN BRI PIMs have four physical ports that support the ISDN BRI S T Figure 56 on page 65 or ISDN BRI U Figure 57 on page 65 interface type Figure 36 ISDN BRI S T PIM Ger E E ee BRI 2 STATUS SORT n D LJ STATUS ORT e 4 me 9002335 9002336
123. J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Release 8 4 Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net Part Number 530 020998 01 Revision 1 This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine developed by Epilogue Technology an Integrated Systems Company Copyright 9 1986 1997 Epilogue Technology Corporation All rights reserved This program and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes copyright 9 1988 1989 1995 University of Toronto This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California Copyright 1979 1980 1985 1986 1988 989 1991 1992 1995 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved GateD software copyright 1995 the Regents of the University All rights reserved Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 5 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators Gated is based on Kirton s EGP UC Berkeley s routing daemon routed and DCN s HELLO routing protocol Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation Portions of th
124. J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 55 Set Up Quick Configuration Summary continued Field Function Your Action Current System Time Synchronizes the system time with the NTP server or manually set the system time and date m To immediately set the time using the NTP server click Set Time via NTP The router sends a request to the NTP server and synchronizes the system time NOTE If you are configuring other settings on this page the router also synchronizes the system time using the NTP server when you click Apply or OK m Tosetthe time manually click Set Time Manually A pop up window allows you to select the current date and time from lists Network DNS Name Servers Specify a DNS server that the router can use to resolve hostnames into addresses To add an IP address type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add To delete an IP address click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Domain Search Adds each domain name that the router is included in to the configuration so that they are included in a DNS search To add a domain name type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add To delete a domain name click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Default Gateway Defines a default gateway through which to direct packets addressed to networks not explicitly listed in the rout
125. Key Text box paste the license key text in plain text format for the license to be added Click OK to add the license key Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 164 m Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface To delete one or more license keys from a Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 Inthe J Web interface select Manage Licenses 2 Select the check box of the license or licenses you want to delete 5 Click Delete 4 Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface To display the license keys installed on a Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 Inthe J Web interface select Manage Licenses 2 Under Installed Licenses click Display Keys to display all the license keys installed on the router A screen displaying the license keys in text format appears Multiple licenses are separated by a blank line 5 Goon to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface To download the license keys installed on the Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 In the J Web interface select Manage gt Licenses 2 Under Installed Licenses click Download Keys to download all the license keys installed on the router to a single file 5
126. L PIM Figure 40 on page 66 provides symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL physical interfaces to ATM network media types The G SHDSL PIM has two ports for ATM over SHDSL connections Figure 40 G SHDSL PIM 9002328 The G SHDSL PIM supports the following key features m Onboard network processor m 2 port two wire mode and 1 port four wire mode m Programmable line rates in both modes m 2 porttwo wire mode supports autodetection of line rate and fixed line rates from 192 Kbps to 2 504 Mbps in 64 Kbps increments m l port four wire mode supports fixed line rates from 584 Kbps to 4 608 Mbps in 128 Kbps increments m 32 virtual channels per PIM m ATM over G SHDSL framing m Dying gasp notification m Local and remote loopback diagnostics m ITU T G 991 2 ITU T G 994 1 and ITU T G 997 1 standards compliance NOTE Payload loopback functionality is not supported on ATM over SHDSL interfaces For pinouts of cable connectors for G SHDSL PIMs see ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 1 1 Connector Pinout on page 240 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 The G SHDSL PIM has two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its ports Table 33 on page 67 describes the meaning of the LED states Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 33 LEDs for G SHDSL PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily Online with no alar
127. LED Power RESET Console LAN USB ESD button CONFIG port ports ports point button The components of the front panel are described in the following sections m Physical Interface Modules PIMs on page 20 m Power Button and POWER LED on page 20 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 19 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 20 m m STATUS LED on page 21 m ALARM LED on page 21 m HALED on page 22 m RESET CONFIG Button on page 22 m Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 25 m Console Port on page 25 m AUX Port on page 25 m USB Port on page 24 Physical Interface Modules PIMs Physical Interface Modules PIMs provide the physical connection to various network media types For information about individual PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 For pinouts of PIM cable connectors see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 For PIM replacement instructions see Replacing a PIM on page 174 The J2320 front panel has three slots and the J2350 front panel has five slots for field replaceable PIMs These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left to right as shown in Figure 10 on page 20 Slot 0 is a fixed interface module that contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports For more information see Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 235 Figure 10 Slot Number Diagram on J2320 and J2350 J2320 J2350 SLOT
128. M Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 1 RX Ring 2 2 RX Tip 4 4 TX Ring 5 5 TX Tip 3 3 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground 7 No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect Table 82 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinout RJ 48 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 4 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 5 RX Tip TX Tip 4 1 TX Ring lt gt RX Ring 5 2 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip 5 5 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground Y No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect 238 Mm ElandT1R 48 Cable Pinouts Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 83 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T2 E1 PIM DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 11 RX Ring gt RX Ring 2 5 RX Tip lt gt RX Tip 4 9 TX Ring gt TX Ring 5 1 TX Tip lt gt TX Tip 5 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground 7 o connect o connect 8 o connect o connect 9 o connect o connect 10 o connect o connect 11 o connect o connect 12 o connect o connect 13 o connect o connect 14 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect Table 84 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Cros
129. M510 JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Telephony E1 T1 media 1 through 3 Interface module J2350 S ots Module m TIM510 1 through 5 TIM514 m TIM514 JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Analog analog media 1 through 3 Telephony module m J2350 Slots Interface m TIM514 1 through 5 Module TIM521 BRI m TIM521 BRI JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Telephony media 1 through 3 Interface module Di J2350 S ots Module m TIM52 1 through 5 68 Avaya VoIP Modules Table 35 J4350 and J6350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering a Chassis type pim 0 port TGM550 TGM550 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through6 One required vp 3 0 0 Telephony Gateway Gateway Module If more than one See the interface Module TGM550 TGM550 is installed naming conventions only the one in the in the J series Services lowest numbered slot Router Basic LAN and is enabled For WAN Access example if TGM550s Configuration Guide are installed in slots 2 and 3 only the one in slot 2 is enabled TIM510 E1 T1 TIM510 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through6 Two Telephony E1 T1 media Interface module Module TIM510 TIM514 TIM514 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through 6 Four Analog analog media Telephony module Interface TIM514 Module TIM521 BRI TIM521 B
130. NOScript access gt JUNOScript SSL Certificate To configure Web access settings in the J Web interface 1 Enter information into the Secure Access Quick Configuration page as described in Table 59 on page 155 2 Click one of the following buttons m To apply the configuration and stay on the Quick Configuration page click Apply m To apply the configuration and return to the Quick Configuration page click OK a To cancel your entries and return to the Quick Configuration page click Cancel 154 1H Configuring Secure Web Access Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access 5 To verify that Web access is enabled correctly connect to the router using one of the following methods m For HTTP access In your Web browser type http URL or http IP address m For HTTPS access In your Web browser type https URL or https IP address m For SSL JUNOScript access A JUNOScript client such as JUNOScope is required For information about how to log in to JUNOScope see the JUNOScope Software User Guide 4 To verify the secure Web access configuration see Verifying Secure Web Access on page 157 Table 59 Secure Access Quick Configuration Summary Field Function Your Action Certificates Certificates Displays digital certificates required for SSL access to the Services Router Allows you to add and delete SSL certificates For information about how to generate an SSL
131. NUMBER SLOT NUMBER 1 2 1 3 3 2 004104 Power Button and POWER LED The power button is located on the left side of the front panel see Figure 1 on page 14 You can use the power button to power the Services Router on and off When you power on the router the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard Table 7 on page 21 describes the POWER LED J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Table 7 J2320 and J2350 POWER LED Color State Description Green On steadily Power is functioning correctly Blinking Power button has been pressed and quickly released and the router is gracefully shutting down Unlit Off Router is not receiving power After the router is powered on status indicators such as LEDs on the front panel and show chassis command output can take up to 60 seconds to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds If you need to power off the router after the Routing Engine finishes booting use the J Web interface or the CLI to halt the Services Router first For instructions see the Jrseries Services Router Administration Guide Alternatively you can press and release the power button to gracefully shut down the router For more information see Powering a Services Route
132. ONSOLE Polimodal 257 TGM550 cons le pott eee rf rette 241 DB 9 to DB 25 serial port adapter ono 140 DC power cables See DC power cables conrnectng DOWGE eite oe bent dedicated DC power feed requirement electrical specfications grounding requirements and warning grounding the TOUTE sce eee oe Hr edente installing a 6550 power SUPPlY ooo J23 ZO a circ rtt tec utut entering ER EE J4350 SYStEM we stein dee edit D6 J6550 SYSTEM eee cd power disconnection warning 255 removing a J6550 power supply 197 EELER gesiess d LS ces 106 safety guidelines general 252 safety guidelines power sources for redundant power Supplies one oH nne tyi 252 wiring sequence W TnImg 255 wiring terminations Warning 256 DC power cables electrical specfications a 108 physical reguirements oiimi Sia eein 108 replacing aide ai etd de test an een 196 usage wa rinmg cece cere creer eeenenea 252 Declaration of Confort 282 default gateway defining Quick Configurattomt 144 e ee EE 132 deleting all configurations with RESCUE CONFIG DUTTON Mec D 22 35 licenses Clica epa ee ees tones 166 licenses JW ED id nein et e Det 165 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 133 DHCP server after initial conftguration 155 before initial conftguratton eee 133 regaining lost lease after initial configuration aeree shh ee rettet 143 diagnosis CHASSIS doe omma put EQ Uer m esta e Sa 2
133. Perform the configuration tasks described in Table 60 on page 156 If you are finished configuring the router commit the configuration To check the configuration see Verifying Secure Web Access on page 157 Table 60 Configuring a Secure Web Access Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Navigate to the Security 1 Inthe J Web interface select From the edit hierarchy level enter level in the configuration Configuration gt View and Edit gt Edit hierarchy Configuration edit security 2 Next to Security click Configure or Edit 156 HN Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor Table 60 Configuring a Secure Web Access continued Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Import the SSL certificate that you have 1 Next to Certificates click Configure Enter generated for example d Ario Lc CHOR Add new entry set certificates local new load key filepath new 5 Inthe Name box type a name for the certificate to be imported for example Replace path with a path or URL to the file For information about new containing an SSL certificate and private key generating SSL certificates in PEM format for example see Generating SSL 4 Inthe Certificate box paste the generated var tmp new pem Certificates on page 155 SSL certificate and private key 5 Click OK Enable HTTPS access and
134. Qhost Possible completions Enter Execute this command activate Remove the inactive tag from a statement annotate Annotate the statement with a comment commit Commit current set of changes copy Copy a statement deactivate Add the inactive tag to a statement delete Delete a data element edit Edit a sub element exit Exit from this level help Provide help information Using the Command Line Interface m 91 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CLI Basics insert Insert a new ordered data element load Load configuration from ASCII file quit Quit from this level rename Rename a statement rollback Roll back to previous committed configuration run Run an operational mode command save Save configuration to ASCII file set Set a parameter show Show a parameter status Show users currently editing configuration top Exit to top level of configuration up Exit one level of configuration wildcard Wildcard operations The JUNOS software configuration consists of a hierarchy of statements There are two types of statements container statements which contain other statements and leaf statements which do not contain other statements All the container and leaf statements together form the configuration hierarchy Each statement consists of a fixed keyword and optionally an identifier that you define such as the name of an interface or a username To configure the Services Router or to modify a
135. RI JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through6 Two Telephony media Interface module Module TIM521 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module The TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module Figure 41 on page 70 also known as the TGM550 Gateway Module has two analog telephone ports two analog trunk ports and a serial console port The TGM550 enables routers to provide VoIP services to telephones and trunks that do not directly support VoIP by translating voice and signaling data between VoIP and the system used by the telephones and trunks Avaya VoIP Modules m 69 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 70 m Figure 41 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module 9003855 The TGM550 provides the following key features m Voice VoIP Media Gateway services Two analog telephone LINE ports to support two analog telephones or incoming analog direct inward dialing DID trunks with either wink start or immediate start An analog relay supports emergency transfer relay ETR Two analog trunk TRUNK ports to support loop start ground start centralized automatic message accounting CAMA and direct inward and outward dialing DIOD for Japan only trunks Survivability features for continuous voice services Call center capabilities m Provisioning Avaya Communication Manager CM media server management Extensive alarm and troubleshooting features m Survivability Media Gateway Controller MGC
136. RTN the negative lead to the terminal labeled 48 VDC and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies If your J6550 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power supply make sure that the two DC power supplies are powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A and feed B This configuration provides the commonly deployed A B feed redundancy for the system Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to total power failure if one of the power supplies fails TUR ER WR Juniper Networks 248 run Ze IRA URGE Be SLAP Fe PED A Fe Wi FEI DDR DE Juniper Networks we 4 amp Ei pt Fa HW a BIST S 8 48 BE EE PE E Gu Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information DC Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit To ensure that all power is off locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit b
137. Routers on page 207 and Replacing Air Filters on J4550 and J6550 Routers on page 208 Yellow minor Routing Engine fan has failed Replace the failed fan To contact JTAC see Requesting Support on page xxi Red major Troubleshooting Power Management 212 m If one or more PIMs remain offline when you power on the chassis the combination of PIMs installed might exceed the power and heat capacity of the chassis For information about the maximum power and heat tokens permitted for each chassis see Planning for Power Management on page 110 Troubleshooting Power Management Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Hardware Components To bring the PIM online 1 Check if the PIM has exceeded the power and heat tokens permitted by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis power ratings CLI commands user host gt show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online CPU less FPC 1 Online CPU less FPC 2 Online CPU less FPC 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Offline Hardware exceeds High Power token limits In this example J series power management has placed the PIM in slot 5 in an offline state to prevent damage If brought online the PIM would cause the combination of PIMs to exceed the maximum limit of 85 po
138. SET CONFIG button for 15 seconds or more until the STATUS LED blinks red deletes all configurations on the router including the backup configurations and rescue configuration and loads and commits the factory configuration J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview You can change the default behavior of the RESET CONFIG button For more information see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports Four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces to hubs switches local servers and workstations You can also designate an Ethernet port for management traffic When configuring one of these ports you use the interface name that corresponds to the port s location From left to right on the front panel the interface names for the ports are ge 0 0 0 ge 0 0 1 ge 0 0 2 and ge 0 0 3 For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information see Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 235 Each port has two LEDs a TX RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right side Table 10 on page 23 describes the built in Ethernet port LEDs Table 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving data Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not re
139. Select Save it to disk and specify the file to which the license keys are to be written 4 Goon to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 Managing J series Licenses with the CLI To manage the J series licenses with the CLI perform the following tasks m Adding New Licenses with the CLI on page 165 m Deleting a License with the CLI on page 166 m Saving License Keys with the CLI on page 166 Adding New Licenses with the CLI To add a new license key to the Services Router with the CLI Managing J series Licenses with the CU Mm 165 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 1 Enter operational mode in the CLI 2 Enter one of the following CLI commands m Toadda license key from a file or URL enter the following command specifying the filename or the URL where the key is located request system license add filename url m To add a license key from the terminal enter the following command request system license add terminal 5 When prompted enter the license key separating multiple license keys with a blank line If the license key you enter is invalid an error is generated when you press Ctrl D to exit license entry mode 4 Goonto Verifying J series License Management on page 167 Deleting a License with the CLI To delete a license key from the Services Router with the CLI 1 Enter operational mode in the CLI 2 Enter the following command for each license
140. TN varten RTN maajohto maajohtoon WARNING Attention C blez l approvisionnement d alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets appropri s l extr mit de c blage En reliant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est rectifi pour rectifier RTN RTN puis 48 V 48 V En d branchant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est 48 V 48 V RTN RTN a alors rectifi pour rectifier Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois WARNING Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom Versorgung mit den passenden Ans tzen am Verdrahtung Ende Wenn man Energie anschlie t wird die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge gerieben um RTN zu RTN dann 48 V bis 48 V zu reiben Wenn sie Energie trennt ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge 48 V bis 48 V RTN zu RTN rieb dann um zu reiben Beachten Sie da der Erdungsdraht immer zuerst angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte WARNING Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC Cablare l alimentatore CC usando i connettori adatti all estremit del cablaggio come illustrato Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 255 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 256 m La corretta sequenza di cablaggio da massa a massa da positivo a p
141. TPS J Web provides access to all the configuration statements supported by the Services Router so you can fully configure it without using the JUNOS CLI You can perform the following tasks with the J Web interface Monitoring Display the current configuration and information about the system interfaces chassis routing protocols routing tables routing policy filters and other features m Configuring View the current configurations at a glance configure the Services Router and manage configuration files The J Web interface provides the following different configuration methods m Configure the Services Router quickly and easily without configuring each statement individually m Edita graphical version of the JUNOS CLI configuration statements and hierarchy User Interface Overview m 79 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CLI Overview Before You Begin 80 1H Before You Begin m Edit the configuration in a text file a Upload a configuration file The J Web interface also allows you to manage configuration history and set a rescue configuration m Diagnosing Diagnose routing problems by running the ping or traceroute diagnostic tool The diagnostic tools also allow you to capture and analyze control traffic on the routers m Managing Manage log temporary and core crash files and schedule reboots on the J series routers On J series routers you can also manage sof
142. We recommend changing the filter every 6 months However the optimal filter replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is located If temperature alarms appear inspect the air filter To replace the air filter 1 Loosen the filter tray thumbscrew at the rear of the 2550 chassis 2 Hold the screw firmly and pull it away from the chassis until you have pulled the attached filter tray out of the chassis see Figure 99 on page 207 Figure 99 Removing the Air Filter Tray 9004116 Air filter tray 3 Hook and loop fasteners on the base of the filter tray hold the air filter inside the tray Grasp the air filter with your fingers and gently pull it away from the filter tray 4 Setthe old air filter aside 5 Place the new filter so that its edge aligns with the first hook and loop fastener as shown Figure 100 on page 208 Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers m 207 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 100 Placing the Air Filter on the Air Filter Tray Align the air filter edge with the first hook and loop fastener strip Air filter tray Air filter 6 Press down on the filter until it is firmly seated against the bottom of the tray 7 Hold the filter tray with the thumbscrew so that its sheet metal side faces the power supply fan exhaust The air filter tray is designed to prevent it from being inserted incorrectly see Figure 101 on pa
143. a Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt bruk Aviso Este equipamento dever estar ligado terra Certifique se que o host se encontra ligado terra durante a sua utiliza o normal jAtenci n Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra Asegurarse de que el equipo principal est conectado a tierra durante el uso normal Varning Denna utrustning ar avsedd att jordas Se till att vardenheten ar jordad vid normal anv ndning Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden WARNING The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket outlet Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Varning Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat natuttag In Case of Electrical Accident If an electrical accident results in an injury take the following actions in this order 1 Usecaution Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury 2 Disconnect power from the Services Router 5 lf possible send another person to get medical aid Otherwise assess the condition of the victim then call for help Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning WARNING The J6550 Services Router has more than
144. a USB storage device provides secondary storage for the router It can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode If the internal compact flash fails on startup and the external compact flash is not installed or fails the router boots from the USB storage device For information about configuring the USB storage device see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net To remove and install a USB storage device perform the following procedures m Removing the USB Storage Device on page 188 m Installing the USB Storage Device on page 189 Removing the USB Storage Device 188 m a NOTE Depending on your configuration the Services Router might not have a USB storage device If no USB storage device is installed proceed directly to Installing the USB Storage Device on page 189 The USB storage device is installed into the USB port on the front panel of the Services Router To remove the USB storage device Replacing USB Storage Devices Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 1 Verify the device that the router used to boot by running the show system storage command from the CLI For example user host gt show system storage Filesystem 512 blocks Used Avail Capacity Mounted on dev ad0s1a 218254 175546 40526 81 The boot device is mounted on The
145. a ttt lets 3 network cables and connectors 225 PIMS leese hebben ts 45 release Notes URL uh ot in xv safety and compliance 245 site preparation aon dee ld ee P 101 MDURACCESS so ds SEA tds EAM DE 151 user interfaces See user interfaces 296 m Index J Web configuration editor basic settings sei Le eet d ee s 145 configuration hierarchy deplay 85 initial CONIgULAtiON ooo 145 A O degt 156 J Web interface configuration editor See J Web configuration editor CONNECtI E anpii sin ASS deen il grs 155 context sensitive help 85 94 Help ICOM a 84 Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide version eil Elle ee 81 JayOUt oi e oet sce edel bol Reise nes 82 maii parie beu Tete t ee op Ue 84 managing Icenses o ioraa ine Ea 165 A e bet ete Et oping 79 page dJayout iie Ae e Aen 82 Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration regaining lost DHCP lease after initial J2320 COMMSUPAUON Poco ee ree stead ritate Pn 145 O M SS 88 Side Dane uui stage etd etas 85 Star RB lc top pane windows multiple unpredictable results WIES E AUR costes Ee 88 J Web Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration Avaya VoIP modules eee teet 67 LR eb eese oerte 19 boot seg ent maite tede tet rettet 19 GET 14 chassis cover replacing aisy ene i neea eet 178 compact flash Jocatton 181 compact flash replachng 181 COOlINE SYSTERN eenegen nta 25 electrical specfications 107 external compact flash 24 LEI 25
146. aae aale 54 description cnet dees tia a 52 high speed slot Jocations 54 iristallatiOD ee tet vc e ee t eed 54 LEDS geb fce 454 limitations con rte is 54 link speeds and transmission modes s 55 SFP optical interface support 54 Gigabit Ethernet ports Dutt usd dit 25 55 COPPER es Ns heads elias Aes 52 LED States tatiana 25 55 52 54 POLO o ree td Eed depuis pathos 155 RJ 45 connector pinouts CPIM ee 236 RJ 45 connector pinouts uPIMS ssssss 255 SEP OptiGal ie nl LA ree RI Ies 51 53 Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs alarms tte este ata wings Ehe 52 description nh ie ce baie o 49 Instalar x RM Lt n e AS M EAE ets 51 LEDS sealed daa pulvendttla ierg 52 limitan ii dt dis 51 link speeds and transmission modes 51 SFP optical interface support 52 glossary basic Connectivity ie det ate Det et eee 129 IN LEE Enos PS stats 44 Secure WED ACCESS cue estt aeneus Aon 151 graceful sbutdown cocoa i re a 127 graphical user interface See J Web interface grounding Avaya VoIP 10 AWG replacement cable 67 G e 121 E EE 121 DC power requirements and warning 254 equipment Warning eret ex tena 258 grounding lug COnnectlng scc tee EET 123 125 group licensess cce tea oie e meet ees 164 GUI See J Web interface H HA high availability LEID 22 35 hardware alarm conditions and remedies 211 Avaya VoIP module overview 67 installatio
147. able leads cannot become active during installation 196 1H Replacing Power System Components Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components A CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply 5 Remove the power cable from the DC power source 6 UseaPhillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block 7 Within the terminal block remove the screw that fastens the power cable lug to the terminal block 8 Carefully move the power cable out of the way 9 Using the removed screw secure the replacement power cable see 1 to the appropriate terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten The screw contains a captive washer used to secure the power cable lug to the terminal block ES NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed For information about connecting to DC power sources see Connecting Power on page 122 10 Dress the power cable appropriately 11 Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block 12 Verify that the power cable does not block access to router components or drape where people mi
148. able pinouts 227 RS 252 DTE Gable pirtouts c iret Pe 226 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE cable pinouts 229 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE cable pinouts 227 S S T port See ISDN BRI ports safety guidelines and warnings ACPOWE ied ted erster dile 251 battery handling 2 5 etu dis 273 DC power general reren 252 DC power dsconnecton 255 DC power wiring sequence warning 255 DC power wiring terminations warning 256 Index DC power grounding requirements and WATTS Sith s to tss b La ose EAS 254 DC power redundant power supplies 252 electrical nes ee eR 250 general oudit kiredi a E de e a a e ege 247 grounded eguipment 258 in case of electrical accdenmt eee 259 installation aio 263 Jewelry E Aliento oeste te sess ek oem Hotte ts 274 lasersrand EDS ute 269 AE ag e ee RI eR IES 245 lightening activity oet ete gt eet edes 276 maintenance and operatlon 273 multiple power supplies ono 259 Operating teMPperatuLe eee 277 power disconnection ueteres 260 PLOGUCEAdISPOSAl si s idees d tees 278 rack Mounting eneses pter tie rH d 264 elen CT 268 read installation inStructiONS ooo 264 telecommunications cord 262 INN A p etus tede 261 safety standards ESA etes cate otn ede sample configuration for basic connectivity for secure access Tor SSE Certificates ooi eb iii Saving licenses Cll iere sagte Rr ete s
149. ace Interface that a Services Router the DTE uses to exchange information with a serial device such as a modem the DCE A DTE cable uses a male 9 pin or 25 pin connector and a DCE cable uses a female 9 pin or 25 pin connector demand circuit Interface configured for dial on demand routing backup In OSPF the demand circuit reduces the amount of OSPF traffic by removing all OSPF protocols when the routing domain is in a steady state dial backup Feature that reestablishes network connectivity through one or more backup ISDN dialer interfaces after a primary interface fails When the primary interface is reestablished the ISDN interface is disconnected dial in Feature that enables J series Services Routers to receive calls from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection The remote end of the ISDN call might be a service provider a corporate central location or a customer premises equipment CPE branch office All incoming calls can be verified against caller IDs configured on the router s dialer interface See also callback 44 m PIM and VoIP Module Terms Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 18 PIM and VoIP Module Terms continued Term Definition dialer filter Stateless firewall filter that enables dial on demand routing backup when applied to a physical ISDN interface and its dialer interface configured as a passive static route The passive static route has a lower priorit
150. address for the management port you are using before you save your initial configuration When you save the configuration for the first time you will lose the connection to the router if you have not manually configured the IP address If you lose connection through the management interface you must connect through the console port Figure 64 Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers 9004137 RJ 45 cable Connecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Figure 65 Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J4350 and J6350 Routers RJ 45 cable Connecting to the CLI Locally If you plan to use the CLI to configure the router you must connect through the console port as shown in Figure 66 on page 158 and Figure 67 on page 159 eS NOTE Figure 66 on page 138 and Figure 67 on page 139 show a connection to a local management device A remote connection to the router through a modem requires the cable and connector shown provided in the router s accessory box plus a DB 9 female to DB 25 male or similar adapter for your modem which you must purchase separately To connect to the CLI using a local management device through the console port on the router 1 Turn off power to the router 2 Turn off the power to the management device such as a PC or laptop computer that you are using to access the CLI 5 Plug one end of the Ether
151. ains the following topics J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 15 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 Software Overview on page 39 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features This section contains the following topics J2320 and J2350 Chassis on page 14 J2320 and J2350 Midplane on page 18 J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 18 J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices on page 19 J2320 and J2350 Front Panel on page 19 J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes on page 24 J2320 Power System on page 24 J2350 Power System on page 24 J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m L J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J2320 and J2350 Chassis 14 m The J2320 and J2350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router components see Figure 1 on page 14 through Figure 7 on page 17 The chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets For information about acceptable rack types see Rack Requirements on page 102 In addition to the components described in subsequent sections the chassis includes the following components m Mounting brackets One pair of metal brackets can be mounted at the front or center of the chassis for mounting the chassis in a rack or cabinet m Earthing terminal A protective earthing terminal and a PEM nut at the rear of the
152. al Ground 52 24 51 Terminal Timing A 26 to 25 E m 50 to 29 m 18to 17 I D 230 HN Serial PIM Cable Specifications EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinout Table 71 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 60 5 59 Receive Data A 57 4 58 Request to Send A 48 5 47 Clear to Send A 33 6 Data Set Ready A 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 51 9 52 Receive Clock B 14 0 15 Received Line Signal Detector B 6 1 5 Terminal Timing B 55 2 56 Transmit Clock B 47 3 48 Clear to Send B 2 4 1 Transmit Data B 56 5 55 Transmit Clock A 59 6 60 Receive Data B 52 7 51 Receive Clock A 45 8 Local Loopback 38 9 5T Request to Send B 9 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 25 Signal Ground 5 24 6 Terminal Timing A 26 to 25 E Ze 50 to 29 m E Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 231 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide V 35 DTE Cable Pinout Table 72 V 35 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground 57 B Signal Ground 48 Request to Send 57 D Clear to Send 9 E Data Set Ready 15 F
153. alski Joshua Kim Jerry Isaac Archana Maheshwari Hareesh Kumar Kozhippurath Narayana Panicker Laura Phillips Cheryl Potter Frank Reade Swapna Steiger Selvakumar T S Alan Twhigg and Keldyn West Editing Taffy Everts and Stella Hackell Illustration Faith Bradford Brown and Nathaniel Woodward Cover Design Edmonds Design Revision History 29 June 2007 Revision 1 The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history YEAR 2000 NOTICE Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant The JUNOS software has no known time related limitations through the year 2038 However the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036 SOFTWARE LICENSE The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase order or to the extent applicable to any reseller agreement or end user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks By using this software you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions Generally speaking the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions against certain uses The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated You should consult the license for further details For complete product documentation pleas
154. any Services Router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 50 V You can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge ESD damage which can cause intermittent or complete component failures m Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin A CAUTION For safety periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap The measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms m When handling any component that is removed from the chassis make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge points on the chassis which are shown in Figure 1 on page 14 Figure 2 on page 15 and Figure 13 on page 28 m Avoid contact between the component and your clothing ESD voltages emitted from clothing can still damage components m When removing or installing a component always place it component side up on an antistatic surface in an antistatic card rack or in an electrostatic bag see Figure 107 on page 249 If you are returning a component place it in an electrostatic bag before packing it Figure 107 Place a Component into an Electrostatic Bag CAUTION A
155. ards purchased from Juniper Networks for your J series platform and model 180 Mm Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 76 Location of J2320 and J2350 Internal Compact Flash Compact flash cover screws 4 Chassis front Internal compact flash cover D GO CJ E d VW 9004121 Internal compact flash To replace the internal compact flash 1 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle Remove chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 WARNING If the fans are still rotating wait until they stop before proceeding with the next step With a Phillips screwdriver loosen the pan head screws that secure the internal compact flash slot cover Remove
156. are Releases Sample Interface Name PIM for This PIM Slot and Port Numbering type pim 0 port 1 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 4 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 0 Ethernet uPIM Port 0 6 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 3 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 5 Ethernet uPIM Ports 0 through 5 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet JUNOS 8 3 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 7 uPIM Ports 0 through 7 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet JUNOS 8 3 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 15 uPIM Ports 0 through 15 1 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 0 and later Can be installed in any ge 3 0 0 Ethernet ePIM high speed slot as follows m J4350 Slots 3 and 6 Port 0 m J6350 Slots 2 3 5 and 6 Port 0 Dual Port Serial PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 se 3 0 1 Ports 0 and 1 Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 t1 0 0 1 Ports 0 and 1 or e1 0 0 1 Dual Port Channelized Channelized T1 E1 JUNOS 8 1 Slots 1 through 6 ct1 0 0 0 T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM and later Port 0 and 1 ce1 0 0 0 ISDN PRI JUNOS 8 3 and later 48 m Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 20 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary continued Supported Software Releases Sample Interface Name PIM for This PIM Slot and Port Numbering type pim 0 port T3 or E3 PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 t3 0 0 0 Port 0 or e3 2 0 0 Dual Port Fast Ethernet JUNOS 8 0 and
157. at est ea eb i etie bees po es 164 infringement preventing r casir ara 163 See also license infringement ae WEE 164 J Flow traffic analysis 162 JUNOS Internet software 161 REY eer opt tc YE D e oe qe py ue 162 See also license keys managing CDD ut acne Zeg Cte teli qas managing J Web uie cate detecte erret a VE Wicca latest e Eb bod eese idet uem preparation FOE sos nent dr etim eee SAVING CL si ettet ttt traffic analysis VE MB cuit ettet tote qe vals Licenses DE heet de rera lifting guidelines icon serre lightening activity warning LINE and TRUNK ports on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 LINE ports TIM5 TE tita chi e oet etis 74 link activity LED 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 65 LINKED EE 25 55 54 link status LED 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 65 Index LINK SPEED LED Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 61 lithium battery Compliance 280 lOO Or a AE E EE ET EE 132 local connection to the router console port 157 loopback address defining configuration dito 147 defining Quick Configuration 144 OVERVIEW fs eegen de eee e E E ER ee gus 132 LX transceiver Gigabit Ethernet ePIM isaac poetis 54 Gigabit Etherriet PIM eoe estt ttn 52 M main pane LuWeh He 84 maintenance AC power cord replacing 195 EI 208 console port cable Chassis 174 Crypto Accelerator Module 200 203 DC power cable replachng 196 DRAM modules external compact flash
158. at met bliksem dient u niet aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen WARNING Varoitus Ala ty skentele j rjestelm n parissa l k yhdist tai irrota kaapeleita ukkosilmalla WARNING Attention Ne pas travailler sur le syst me ni brancher ou d brancher les c bles pendant un orage WARNING Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schlie en Sie keine Kabel an bzw trennen Sie keine ab wenn es gewittert WARNING Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un temporale con fulmini WARNING Advarsel Utfer aldri arbeid p systemet eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet nar det tordner eller lyner WARNING Aviso Nao trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante per odos de mau tempo trovoada P bb bib gt b gt b WARNING jAtenci n No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso de descargas el ctricas en la atm sfera Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Varning Vid aska skall du aldrig utf ra arbete pa systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss kablar Operating Temperature Warning WARNING To prevent the router from overheating do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 1040F 400 To prevent airflow restriction allow at least 6 inches 15
159. atic route default nexthop address retain J Web GUI Conventions Bold typeface Represents J Web graphical user interface GUI items you click or select m Inthe Logical Interfaces box select All Interfaces m To cancel the configuration click Cancel gt bold right angle bracket Separates levels in a hierarchy of J Web selections In the configuration editor hierarchy select Protocols gt Ospf Related Juniper Networks Documentation J series Services Routers are documented in multiple guides Although the J series guides provide instructions for configuring and managing a Services Router with the JUNOS CLI they are not a comprehensive JUNOS software resource For complete xviii M Related Juniper Networks Documentation About This Guide documentation of the statements and commands described in J series guides see the JUNOS software manuals listed in Table 4 on page xix Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Getting Started Guide for Your Router Services Router User Interface Overview Establishing Basic Connectivity JUNOS CLI User Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Using Services Router Configuration Tools JUNOS CLI User Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide
160. built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface and six slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules Four of the six slots slots 2 5 5 and 6 support high speed interfaces ePIMs The J6350 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 16 port m SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port J6350 Services Router Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers m Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port m ADSL 2 24 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m Dual Port El PIM m E3 PIM 1 port m DS3 T3 PIM 1 port m Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM m G SHDSL PIM 2 ports m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port TI PIM m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports m TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J series Software Features and Licenses J series Services Routers provide the software features listed in Table 5 on page 7 You must purchase a separate software license to obtain some software features For more information about licenses see Installing and Managing J series Licenses on page 161 Table 5 Summary of J series Featur
161. c Connectivity Table 57 Configuring Basic Settings continued Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Define the NTP server that NTP requests can be sent to 1 Inthe Nested configuration section next to Ntp click Configure or Edit 2 Next to Server click Add New Entry 3 In the Address box type the NTP server s IP address for example 10 148 2 21 4 Click OK 5 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Set the address of the NTP server For example Set ntp server 10 148 2 21 Define the DNS server that receives DNS requests 1 Next to Name server click Add New Entry 2 Inthe Address box type the address of the DNS server for example 10 148 2 32 5 Click OK Set the address of the DNS server For example set name server 10 148 2 32 Add each domain that the router belongs to 1 Next to Domain search click Add New Entry 2 Inthe Value box type the name of the domain in which the router is located for example lab router net 5 Click OK 4 Next to Domain search click Add New Entry 5 Inthe Value box type the name of another domain that the router belongs to for example router net 6 Click OK Set the domains to be searched For example set domain search lab router net set domain search router net Define the backup router to be used when the router is booting or the
162. cause each process accesses its own protected memory space In addition because each process is a separate software package you can selectively upgrade all or part of the JUNOS software for added flexibility Table 17 on page 41 describes the primary JUNOS software processes Chapter 2 System Overview Table 17 JUNOS Software Processes Process Name Description Management mgd Manages the Services Router system as follows process m Provides communication between the other processes and an interface to the configuration database m Populates the configuration database with configuration information and retrieves he information when queried by other processes to ensure that the system operates as configured m Interacts with the other processes when commands are issued through one of he user interfaces on the router Chassis chassisd Controls a Services Router chassis and its components as follows rocess e F P m Detects hardware on the system that is used to configure network interfaces m Monitors the physical status of hardware components and field replaceable units FRUS detecting when environment sensors such as temperature sensors are riggered m Relays signals and interrupts for example when devices are taken offline so hat the system can close sessions and shut down gracefully Routing rpd Defines how routing protocols such as RIP OSPF and BGP operate on the router protocol including selecti
163. ccess BM 155 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 59 Secure Access Quick Configuration Summary continued Field Function Your Action Enable HTTPS on All Enables HTTPS on all interfaces at one To enable HTTPS on all interfaces select the Enable Interfaces time HTTPS on All Interfaces check box HTTPS Enabled Allows you to specify interfaces on which Select and deselect interfaces by clicking the direction Interfaces you want to enable HTTPS access arrows m Toenable HTTPS access on an interface add the interface to the HTTPS Interfaces list m Todisable HTTPS access on an interface add the interface to the Logical Interfaces list JUNOScript over SSL Enable SSLJUNOScript Enables secured SSL access to the To enable SSL access select the Enable SSL JUNOScript access JUNOScript XML scripting API access check box JUNOScript SSL Specifies SSL certificates to be used for To enable an SSL certificate select a certificate from Certificate encryption the JUNOScript SSL Certificate list for example new This field is available only after you create at least one SSL certificate Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor You can manage your Services Router using a secure Web connection by enabling HTTPS To enable HTTPS on your Services Router 1 Navigate to the top of the configuration hierarchy in either the J Web or CLI configuration editor
164. ceiving data Console Port You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing Engine through an RJ 45 serial cable From the chassis console port you can use the CLI to configure the router The console port is configured as data terminal equipment DTE and supports the RS 252 EIA 252 standard For information about securing the chassis console port see the J series Services Router Administration Guide For pinout information see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 256 AUX Port The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J series Services Router is for future use and is not activated J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features WM 23 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide USB Port The USB ports on the front panel of the router see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 accept a USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with a compact flash installed as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association When a USB storage device is installed and configured it automatically acts as a secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending on the size of the USB storage device you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring a USB storage device see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE For a lis
165. cess configuration 157 JUNOScript Get SS a ie oed ertet E RS 155 298 m Index K Kernel cose eee rad ie ertet 40 key sequences editing in CL 92 L labels serial number 215 216 laptop See management device lasers beani Warning eee it er are e e T Re 270 Class 1 product warmimg nure eaan eak 269 open aperture WaININ seiscome e emet 271 safety guidelines 269 layout c WeD sio dal it 82 CA E ee 92 LEDs ACT TGM550 active 72 ACT TIM510 active a delete desees tte 74 ACT TIMST4 aCtiV8 redet ene 75 ACT TIMS2 7 8 tiV8 sien t e PEE SEEE 76 ACTIVITY status dual port PIM 61 ADSL PIM Status cest eee qe Eed 65 ADSL POTC Status cruz etes tede an amb ded 65 ALARM as siestas diste s rettet hend 21 34 ALM IGM550 alarrt oat trt eere 12 ALM TIMSS TO alartri i eerie ens 74 ALM XTIM514 alarm eniti tms 75 ALM TIM521 alarm 76 ASB alternate software Dank 72 channelized El DEIER degt d tetris 59 channelized T1 POS cuina ibn 59 Class 1 product Warning ensasini ia 270 EJ pott statas tette ed as 57 ES port SIatus cero ttr a ag ure eee teats 60 ETR emergency transfer rela 72 Fast Ethernet port status 4 port ePIM 65 Fast Ethernet port status dual port PIM 61 GISHDSL PIM status tete trei eerta 67 Gigabit Ethernet port status 25 55 54 HA c das eh e tenta egeta oen 22 55 SDN PIM Status ees oed ett d DD es 64 S
166. cess the CLI to execute commands from a remote system However unlike Telnet SSH encrypts traffic so that it cannot be intercepted SSH can be configured so that connections are authenticated by a digital certificate SSH uses public private key technology for both connection and authentication The SSH client software must be installed on the machine where the client application runs If the SSH private key is encrypted for greater security the SSH client must be able to access the passphrase used to decrypt the key For information about obtaining SSH software see http www ssh com and http www openssh com Before you begin initial configuration complete the following tasks m Install the Services Router in its permanent location as described in Installing and Connecting a Services Router on page 115 m Gather the following information Hostname for the router on the network Domain that the router belongs to on the network m Password for the root user m Time zone where the router is located m IP address of an NTP server if NTP is used to set the time on the router m IP address of a DNS server m List of domains that can be appended to hostnames for DNS resolution m IP address of the default gateway m IP address to be used for the loopback interface m IP address of the built in Ethernet interface that you will use for management purposes The examples in this guide use the ge 0 0 0 interface m If you are perf
167. chapter contains the following topics Tools and Parts Required on page 175 Replacing the Console Port Cable on page 174 Replacing a PIM on page 174 Replacing PIM Cables on page 177 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 180 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 183 Replacing External Compact Flashes on page 186 Replacing USB Storage Devices on page 188 Replacing DRAM Modules on page 190 Replacing Power System Components on page 195 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 200 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4550 and J6550 Routers on page 205 Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers on page 207 Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 208 Tools and Parts Required To replace hardware components you need the tools and parts listed in Table 65 on page 174 Tools and Parts Required Mm 173 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 63 Tools and Parts Required Tool or Part Components Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat All Electrostatic discharge ESD All grounding wrist strap Flat blade screw blade screwdriver PIM approximately 1 4 in 6 mm Phillips screwdriver number 1 and number 2 Chassis cover Compact flash Crypto Accelerator Module DRAM modules PIM Power
168. chassis ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations m ESD point One electrostatic discharge ESD point a banana plug receptacle at the front of the chassis minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially hazardous environments CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a functioning router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground see Figure 3 on page 15 Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle For additional safety information see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 245 Figure 1 Front of J2320 Chassis Console Physical Interface port Modules PIMs 004100 Power Auxiliary LAN USB Blank ESD button port ports ports PlMpanel point J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 2 Front of J2350 Chassis Console Physical Interface port Modules PIMs 9004122 Power Auxiliary LAN USB Blank ESD button port ports ports PIM panels point Figure 3 Rear of J2320 Chassis External compact Protective flash cover earthing
169. che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 400C Per evitare che la circolazione dell aria sia impedita lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15 2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle ventole Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 277 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 278 m WARNING Advarsel Unnga overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse skal ikke brukes pa steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40 C 1040F Serg for at klaringen rundt lufte pningene er minst 15 2 cm 6 tommer for forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon WARNING Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router n o utilize este equipamento numa rea que exceda a temperatura m xima recomendada de 40 C Para evitar a restri o circula o de ar deixe pelo menos um espa o de 15 2 cm volta das aberturas de ventila o WARNING jAtenci n Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router se recaliente no lo haga funcionar en un rea en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente m xima recomendada de 409C Para impedir la restricci n de la entrada de aire deje un espacio m nimo de 15 2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilaci n WARNING Varning F rhindra att en Juniper Networks router verhettas genom att inte anv nda den i ett omr de dar den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen p 409C ve
170. ck Log In eS NOTE The default username is root with no password You must change this during initial configuration or the system does not accept the configuration The J Web Quick Configuration gt Set Up or Monitor gt System page appears To explicitly terminate a J Web session at any time click Logout in the top pane Using the J Web Interface m 821 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J Web Layout Each page of the J Web interface is divided into the following panes as shown in Figure 45 on page 82 m Top pane Displays identifying information and links m Main pane Location where you monitor configure diagnose and manage the Services Router by entering information in text boxes making selections and clicking buttons m Side pane Displays subtasks of the Monitor Configuration Diagnose or Manage task currently displayed in the main pane For the configuration editor this pane displays the hierarchy of configuration statements committed on the router Click an item to access it in the main pane m Bottom pane Displays copyright and trademark information Figure 45 J Web Layout Top pane CRIT ROUTER J6350 Monitor Configuration Manage Events i Help About Diagnete gt Ping Moss Logout Ping MPLS Traceroute Ping Host scit Ping Host Packet Capture The ping diagnostic tool sends a series of ICMP echo request packets to the speci
171. code age 5 J6350 Services Router OVervleW toe pedet d tic dt phe My daa Ages did 6 J series Software Features and Licenses ssssssssssss nn nnnnnncnos 7 System Overview 13 J2320 and 2550 Services Router Hardware Features 15 12320 4nd J2 350 EEN 14 2320 and 2350 Midplane s ot o eR en ee ee eR lei ent 18 J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware 18 2320 and 2350 Beer DEVICES i e le aep eie tet een 19 J2320 and J2350 Front Panel 19 Physical Interface Modules PIMs sssssssss nn rccconnnnno 20 Power Button and POWER LED ee 20 STATUS TED EE 21 E RE RE 21 HA SED vert chp bein st vetito da Idee euet ieu atate s 22 RESET CONEIGSBUITOD e ens s aat Modo do T s 22 Built In Gigabit Ethernet Porte cese eterne 25 CONSOLE PONS ds eit Ate este se NM t PIT 25 AUXBOFPU sua dota Eeer tee Tee Ad Be oo ie 25 RE Oe 24 J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes ssssssee 24 Table of Contents WI vii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12320 POWSGE SVSIGITU iid nr she bte doe te kesh tata e MALI RM LAM at Gait een 24 25550 e EE 24 12320 and 2550 Cooling System ie e ett UH eos eee 25 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features ssssssssssseee 26 4550 and 6550 EE 27 4350 and J6350 Midplane 4 5 etri tek ra eer nu EN Ee 31 J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware 31 4350 and J6550 BOOt DEVICES dct eer usi qe Sb nw dete 31 J4550 ANG J6350 Eron
172. creen length CLI setting screen width CLI setting Secure access generating SSE Certificates pterea 155 HTTPS access configuration editor 156 HTTPS access Quick Configuration 155 HTTPS recornimended tae ttp ces 152 installing SSL certificates configuration O sissies tied TE 156 installing SSL certificates Quick CONMSUPATON i seine orte ates 153 JUNOScript SSL access 155 OVERVIEW x oi ette ese etur ent 152 tequiremielrlts vieceeecec err reete sere de eene 152 sample configuration catt t ttes 159 verifying secure access configuration 157 Secure Access page description field summary Secure Sockets Layer See SSL serial number chassis components Jabel 215 216 PUM Sisson EE 218 power supply ctra as eo tinet eres 218 serial ports cables and COnnectors s ue ep t 225 Dual Port Serial PIM e ter ean 55 Index m 303 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide EIA 550A DCE pinouts EIA 550A DTE pinouts LED States scc tette tior gases RS 232 DCE pinouts EN RS 232 DTE PINOUES aA esse re red d es RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE pinouts 229 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE pinouts 227 1 39 DEE ele LEE 255 VI 0 DTE DIFIQUES ata 232 22 DEE PINGUS uri is 234 AX 2 POTE PINOUts itc aa tct 255 service provider contacting for ISDN PLOVISLONING eege ee ee 11
173. ct Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein that the same reflect an allocation of risk between the Parties including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss and that the same form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties 9 Termination Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license granted herein Upon such termination Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer s possession or control 10 Taxes All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes withholdings duties or levies collectively Taxes Customer shall be responsible for paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license or importation or use of the Software 11 Export Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign agency or authority and not to export or re export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws or regulations or without all necessary approvals Customer shall be liable for any such violations The version of the Software s
174. ct the console port to an external management device you need an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter which is also supplied with the router Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 79 RJ 45 Chassis Console Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 RTS Output Request to Send 2 DTR Output Data Terminal Ready 5 TxD Output Transmit Data 4 GND Chassis Ground 5 GND Chassis Ground 6 RxD Input Receive Data 7 DSR Input Data Set Ready 8 CTS Input Clear to Send Table 80 on page 257 describes the DB 9 connector pinouts Table 80 DB 9 Console Connector Pinout Pin Signal Direction Description 1 DCD lt Carrier Detect 2 RxD lt Receive Data 3 TxD gt Transmit Data 4 DTR gt Data Terminal Ready 5 Ground Signal Ground 6 DSR lt Data Set Ready 7 RTS gt Request To Send 8 CTS lt Clear To Send 9 RING lt Ring Indicator E1 and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts The E1 and T1 PIMs use an RJ 48 cable which is not supplied with the PIM CAUTION To maintain agency approvals use only a properly constructed shielded cable E1 and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts M 237 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 81 on page 258 through Table 84 on page 259 describe the RJ 48 connector pinouts Table 81 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinout RJ 48 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PI
175. ction Generic routing encapsulation GRE IP over IP and IP Security IPSec tunnels Advanced Encryption Standard AES 128 192 and 256 bit 56 bit Data Encryption Standard DES and 168 bit 5DES encryption MD5 and Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 authentication Replay attack prevention Stateful firewall packet filters Network Address Translation NAT Voice Support Compressed Real Time Transport Protocol CRTP J2320 J2350 4550 and J6350 Services Routers support voice over IP VoIP routing with the Avaya IG550 Integrated Gateway which consists of modules that can be installed in the PIM slots High Availability Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP Graceful restart according to IETF standards Redundant interfaces System Management JUNOScope network manager Web browser interface for Services Router configuration and management JUNOScript XML application programming interface API JUNOS command line interface CLI for Services Router configuration and management through the console Telnet SSH or J Web CLI terminal Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Traffic Analysis J Flow flow monitoring and accounting License required for J Flow Packet capture PCAP Real time performance monitoring RPM 10 Mm Jseries Software Features and Licenses Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers Table
176. de of service CoS Managing users and operations monitoring performance upgrading J series Services Router Administration Guide software and diagnosing common problems Using the J Web interface J Web Interface User Guide Using the CLI JUNOS CLI User Guide Typically J series documentation provides both general and specific information for example a configuration overview configuration examples and verification methods Because you can configure and manage J series routers in several ways you can choose from multiple sets of instructions to perform a task To make best use of this information m Ifyou are new to the topic Read through the initial overview information keep the related JUNOS guide handy for details about the JUNOS hierarchy and follow the step by step instructions for your preferred interface m Ifyou are already familiar with the feature Go directly to the instructions for the interface of your choice and follow the instructions You can choose a J Web method the JUNOS CLI or a combination of methods based on the level of complexity or your familiarity with the interface xvi W Howto Use This Guide About This Guide For many J series features you can use J Web Quick Configuration pages to configure the router quickly and easily without configuring each statement individually For more extensive configuration use the J Web configuration editor or CLI configuration mode comma
177. de opening van de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden WARNING Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua n kym t nt s teily kun kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettyn v lt s teilylle altistumista l k katso avoimiin aukkoihin WARNING Attention Des radiations invisibles l il nu pouvant traverser l ouverture du port lorsqu aucun c ble en fibre optique n y est connect il est recommand de ne pas regarder fixement l int rieur de ces ouvertures WARNING Warnung Aus der Port ffnung k nnen unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist Vermeiden Sie es sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen und starren Sie nicht in die Offnungen WARNING Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti radiazioni invisibili possono essere emesse attraverso l apertura della porta Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture WARNING Advarsel Unng utsettelse for str ling og stirr ikke inn i pninger som er pne fordi usynlig str ling kan emiteres fra portens pning n r det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel WARNING Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emiss o de radia o invisivel atrav s do orif cio da via de acesso quando esta n o tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado dever evitar a exposi o radia o e n o dever olhar
178. de the following key features m The multiport uPIMs can be used as switches in the access layer for connections to workstations and desktops For more information see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide m Link speed for 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs is configurable to 10 100 or 1000 Mbps and transmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex The 1 port and 6 port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs cannot be manually configured they are set at 1000 Mbps and full duplex m Autonegotiation m l port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs use SFP transceivers to allow different connectors to be used on uPIM ports These SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs support 1000Base SX 1000Base LX and 1000Base T SFPs They do not support 1000Base LH SFPs 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics a Duplex LC PC connector Rx and Tx m Optical interface support See Table 22 on page 52 m Sport and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs and SFPs on the 1 port and 6 port uPIMs support 1000Base T RJ 45 connectors For pinouts of cable connectors for Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs see Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 255 Limitations Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs have the following limitations m Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs do not support SNMP m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM interfaces can be configured up to a maximum MTU size of 9014 bytes Installation Gigabit
179. dividuare l interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC mettere l interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione WARNING Advarsel Fer noen av disse prosedyrene utf res kontroller at str mmen er frakoblet likestr mkretsen S rg for at all str m er sl tt AV Dette gj res ved lokalisere str mbryteren p brytertavlen som betjener likestr mkretsen sl str mbryteren AV og teipe bryterhandtaket p str mbryteren i AV stilling Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos certifique se que desligou a fonte de alimenta o de energia do circuito de corrente continua Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 253 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 254 m de corrente continua e coloque o na posic o OFF Desligado segurando nessa posic o a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora jAtenci n Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos comprobar que la alimentaci n del circuito de corriente continua CC est cortada OFF Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentaci n est cortada OFF localizar el interruptor autom tico en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua cambiar el interruptor autom tico a la posici n de Apagado OFF y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor autom tico
180. does not permit the Customer to and Customer agrees not to and shall not a modify unbundle reverse engineer or create derivative works based on the Software b make unauthorized copies of the Software except as necessary for backup purposes c rent sell transfer or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software in any form to any third party d remove any proprietary notices labels or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product in which the Software is embedded e distribute any copy of the Software to any third party including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market f use any locked or key restricted feature function service application operation or capability without first purchasing the applicable license s and obtaining a valid key from Juniper even if such feature function service application operation or capability is enabled without a key g distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party h use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller i use the Embedded Software on non Juniper equipment j use the Software or make it available for use on Juniper equipment that the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller k disclose the results of testing or benchmarking of the Software to any third party wit
181. e defining Quick Configuration 144 OVERVIEW Maui assess deet aes SE 131 synchronizing configuration editor 147 synchronizing Quick Configuration 145 T T1 ports GESCTIPUON casis fro ene o v d pais e De odds 56 See also channelized T1 ports A ottan nEn AA a RE a a EEP 57 RI 48 cable ptriouts ii dete o entente 257 T1 trunk ports TIM510 descriptions vtero tede ERO enters 75 ITIOUES c ege e ERR 245 T1 E1 media module See TIM510 T3 ports BNC connector PINQUES nta e aa aati a 240 QeSCHDLIORI cse et eae uit eer eam i 59 LED states EE technical support contacting JEAC illa xxi contacting JTAC for hardware return 218 information required for hardware return 219 telecommunications line wire gauge 262 telephone and trunk ports on Avaya VoIP TOMS 50 85 Hox te oe es Aue tes sale od UA 69 Telephony Gateway Module See TGM550 Index mM 305 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Telephony Interface Modules See TIM510 TIM514 TIM521 Telnet defining access Quick Configuration 144 management access 155 temperature required or Operar tate tat 104 Routing Engine too warm 212 shutdown NEBS compliant routers 25 58 shutdown non NEBS compliant routers 58 KE EE 2T temperature alarm air filter replacement for 208 terminal typer Setting varada ertt 97 termino
182. e Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instru es do fabricante WARNING Atenci n Existe peligro de explosi n si la bater a se reemplaza de manera incorrecta Reemplazar la bater a exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente recomendado por el fabricante Desechar las bater as gastadas seg n las instrucciones del fabricante WARNING Varning Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Ers tt endast batteriet med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande F lj tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av anv nda batterier Jewelry Removal Warning WARNING Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines remove jewelry including rings necklaces and watches Metal objects heat up when connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the terminals WARNING Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden sieraden inclusief ringen kettingen en horloges verwijderen Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen A WARNING Varoitus Ennen kuin ty skentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa ota pois kaikki korut sormukset kaulakorut ja ke
183. e GateD software copyright 9 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of the GateD software copyright 1991 D L S Associates This product includes software developed by Maker Communications Inc copyright 9 1996 1997 Maker Communications Inc uniper Networks the Juniper Networks logo NetScreen and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries JUNOS and JUNOSe are trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc All other trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners uniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks U S Patent Nos 5 475 599 5 905 725 5 909 440 6 192 051 6 555 650 6 559 479 6 406 512 6 429 706 6 459 579 6 495 547 6 558 518 6 558 899 6 552 918 6 567 902 6 578 186 and 6 590 785 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Release 8 4 Copyright 2007 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Writing Nidhi Bhargava Michael Bushong Maya Devi Taffy Everts Elizabeth Gardner Walter Gor
184. e an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the PIM Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the Services Router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 Press and release the power button to power off the router Verify that the POWER LED blinks and then turns off Label the cables connected to the PIM so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct PIM Disconnect the cables from the PIM If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops Loosen the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate Grasp the handles on each side of the PIM faceplate and slide the PIM out of the router Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat If you are not reinstalling a PIM into the emptied slot install a blank PIM panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow ReplacingaPIM M 175 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Installing a PIM 176 nm A CAUTION Do not hot swap PIMs Failure to p
185. e dei pde e 66 LED states on a G SHDSL PIM ee 67 BELL connector plrouts 2e etes 240 shipping carton packing a Services Router for shipment 220 packing components for shipment 221 BIDDEN 116 show chassis alarms Commande 211 show chassis fpc pic status Commande 178 show chassis hardware command identifying NEBS compliant routers 38 locating component serial numbers 215 verifying Crypto Accelerator Module Salle BEL ctt teo ritas 205 206 show chassis power ratings Commande 215 show chassis routing engine command checking CPU emperature 25 58 checking DRAM amoumt aiskiai 18 31 verifying DRAM installation and COMMSUPAU ON 2 e oli tmn 195 SHOW cli command is ee cte crier pepe ette reges 95 show system license Commande 168 explanation sa talon cd pae ee einer 168 show system license keys Commande 169 show system license usage Commande 169 explanation Age e pd her etre thee tap 169 shutdown SLAC assi 127 immediate ntk eis e etate teeth 127 temperature See shutdown temperature shutdown temperature NEBS compliant routerg 25 58 non NEBS compliant routerg ccc 38 Side panes ANE astra etie dite meurt 85 SIG TEED Au Lider etel od ARE Med ds 74 signaling Jimttattoms conca 106 site preparation checklist ds eee er eoe 112 electrical wiring guidelines 106 Tite Sae ie cette edt og Nee eo tee haste teas 104 for rack installation sipin st
186. e ec ertet 65 ADSL ports description ac pde pente Pa det tah el 64 n 65 RJ 11 connector Dinouts i e 240 agency 2pDrOVals eeeeeeetteeeeeteeenseees 279 air filter HESE BDO e e pete red errare 25 58 location eoe tot temet replacing airflow CLESETIPUO MN ege eeler e erp iesen 59 space requir mient itata edebant 101 ALARM LED descripto M xs noe ct a onerati eb EM pem 21 54 ITdICatlOIs cote aperte Pe He HR HERR FERES 211 alarms conditions in chassis components 211 BED ie ei dh eed eer MU d Leeds 21 34 ALM LED atan tgp eder a utter xa es 72 A E T e 74 TIM5T4 dl a 75 TIM5 ia ori 76 alternative boot media See boot devices USB altitude requirements sse oe eere etes 104 analog media module See TIM514 Index mM 289 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide analog telephone LINE ports TEMIDO pIriouts eaaa eee TIM514 pnours eee TIM514 possible configurations analog trunk TRUNK ports TEMIDO DID outs uL e eet 242 TIMST4 PINQUES pss o ood tet reet 245 TIM514 possible Conftgurations 75 Annex A Annex B See ADSL SHDSL antistatic Matias a 249 Apply BUO ET 86 approvals AGENCY ss cene ed avec eset 279 ASB EI E tra ear IU EE tg E 72 asymmetric digital subscriber line See ADSL AT modem Commande 140 141 ATADI modetncommioandi bete 140 ATAKO modem Commande 140 ATAW modem commandanten d OE ETE 140 ATDT modem Commande 141 ATSO 1 modem commaarid
187. e ese tod e ode Qe seabed dus 151 Time Zone and Systerd Times ae retener rte ea de eo PO 151 Network Setting Ss soie eet coms e qe op te tede ee enn dates 152 Detaulb Gadteway 1 iced ie Er De Yee cs e s UI NEE 152 Backup Router oes enel e stan Ideen te edere egt em tg Deeds 132 Eoopbach Addtess i e ederet aol wives deste ror D ede eig eee duchess 152 Built In Ethernet Interface Address tiua i a eE 155 Management ACCESS ee Reo ede sale dessa RCM Dunes 155 Before You BEGIN EE 154 Connecting to a Services Router ssssssssssssssssss emen 155 Connecting to the J Web Interface AAA 155 Connecting to the CLI Local 157 Connecting to the CLI Remotely citet a e N E 159 Configuring the Modem at the Router End sssee 159 Connecting the Modem to the Console Port ssssssssssess 140 Connecting to the CLI at the User End 141 Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration coin 141 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Part 3 Chapter 10 Table of Contents Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor ssssss 145 Verifying Basic Correia gue a i rie True e aged 148 Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations sssssse 149 Configuring Secure Web Access 151 Secure WED ACCESS LETS Eege ge dee Secure Web Access Overview normae e e E a Hee eee hee eee nenne Before You EE Generating SSL Certificates Configuring Secure Web Access Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configurati
188. e not been disconnected from their power source Such an action could cause electrical shock In addition observe the warnings and guidelines in the following sections Qualified Personnel Warning WARNING Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the Services Router Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pateva henkil kunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa taman laitteen Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l appareil doit tre r alis par du personnel qualifi et comp tent Warnung Ger t nur von geschultem qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder auswechseln lassen WARNING Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig oppleering ber montere eller bytte ut dette utstyret Aviso Este equipamento dever ser instalado ou substitu do apenas por pessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado jAtenci n Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por personal t cnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado Varning Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och kvalificerad personal Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage M
189. e reete 102 g ldeliness cese teet trt ea tte es toda 101 operating envirorument sicot 104 power fequiremientsSzxu ice e te tatus 106 size BEE 17 J28350 2 ie dt tbe ter e dap e aay 17 EE Ee 50 J63505 5t ome behest Heal attende uel PE 50 requirements for rack installation 102 105 slot numbers PIM chassis diagrarri sd aerei ee br ens 20 55 displayed as FPC number in command O A E uk dec edd M dee 178 small form factor pluggable transceivers See SFP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol no Gigabit Ethernet SUpDOEL s ste itr tiet 51 54 GEES ager rete ipa e 59 Ie abes reste e hs oet dead 39 licenses See licenses See also JUNOS Internet software specifications AC electrical Connection As sinini dia 107 AC POWer COMAS tacita di 108 DC electrical connecton 108 DC ge 108 electrical inea er tut tpi ee dea 106 environmental vans arameo bso 104 rounding cable oie a its 121 12320 Hardware aure eunte dedo reta 17 12350 Hardware care aite o me 17 14350 hardware s uttter DEE 50 J6350 barduware 30 serial PIM cables and connectors 225 SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 2454 SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs espe SRC Application e oe be ME e ges 42 SSH defining configuration editort 146 defining access Quick Configuration 144 r anagement ACCESS auare temet eds 154 SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabling secure access Quick Configuration ina 15
190. e see the Juniper Networks Web site at www juniper net techpubs End User License Agreement READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN YOU AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER AS A REPRESENTATIVE AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN THEN A DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND B YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS 1 The Parties The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks Inc and its subsidiaries collectively Juniper and the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license s for use of the Software Customer collectively the Parties 2 The Software In this Agreement Software means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper supplied software and updates and releases of such software for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller Embedded Software means Software which Juniper has embedded in the Juniper equipment 5 License Grant Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein Juniper grant
191. e t t rte etas 69 dedicated AC power feed requiremen DS1 See E1 ports T1 ports dedicated DC power feed requirement DS3 See E3 ports T5 ports A ar nani er a a E1 See E1 ports inistallingAAC he tee O tede ted E3 See E3 ports installing Dy sese Sete etd ee G SHDSL See SHDSL ports LED States cri tere et eee etes interface EE 178 redundancy det eei ee erre egere ae ISDN See ISDN BRI ports NN ke tr Erde that tds 2320 types supported ertt 46 Index mM 301 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide removing DC ised har e sete iust serial number label power system CONMECUNG xs ate D T PETERE Tabs sce SR cete eno LR of ates EO Ses 12320 tilda itid au E Ee JAB SO vache nbi te t entia e e ab eius JOB SO tien et v ty p Piles tm reet e eg as power supply LED ui etate preparing for installation 101 processes software CHASSIS ele S eee tret aaa 40 forwarding Grocess conocia cocino 40 interface PLOCESS hata 40 management process ssssssssssss sees 40 routing protocol process 40 product disposal iz eg dades to Ardennes 278 product OVERVIEW x oor cane tete uv eb Hence rq pte s 5 prompt See command prompts restart after upgrade prompt provisioning an ISDN line 112 Q Quick Configuration basic settings DUTON Sita initial Configuration 141 SECULE ACCESS PAP iii cd 154 secure Web access 155 oet UPA rc citi teckel petet utet dat 145 R rack installation general reoulremen
192. e used by the PIM For cable specifications see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 2 Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIM faceplate Replacing PIM Cables M 177 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 5 Arrange the cable as necessary to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops 4 Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port 5 Repeatthe previous steps for any additional cables 6 If the PIM is offline its status LED is steadily red issue the following CLI command to bring the PIM online user host gt request chassis fpc slot pim slot online For example to bring the PIM in slot 4 online enter the following command userQ host request chassis fpc slot 4 online For more information about the command see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference 7 Verify that the PIM status LED shines steadily green to confirm that the PIM is online You can also verify correct PIM functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic status command described in the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference eS NOTE In the show chassis fpc pic status command the PIM slot number is re
193. ea qkjjhd ambrha 3tkqkc ayareb zicik6 nv6jck btlxao 2trfyq 65cdou r5tbbb xdarpg qq53lu qcx4vm ydakcs t3yyh2 v5mq G03000002224 aeaqea qkjjhd ambrha 3tkqkc ayargb zicik6 nv6jck btlxao 2trfyq 65cdou r5tbof 14uon5 7rokz7 wgdocl r4q32p 2wu4zf zrxa G03000002225 aeagea qkjjhd ambrha 3tkqkc ayarab zicik6 nv6jck btlxao 2trfyq 65cdou r5tbiu jr6ui2 Imqgqj ouzq5a aiokdn 4tr4u2 wmcq The output shows a list of the license keys installed on the Services Router Verify that each expected license key is present Displaying License Usage M 169 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 170 1m Displaying Installed License Keys Part 3 Maintaining Services Router Hardware m Replacing Hardware Components on page 175 m Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 211 m Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 215 Maintaining Services Router Hardware 8M 171 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 172 Maintaining Services Router Hardware Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Because many of the Services Router s hardware components are field replaceable units FRUS you can remove and replace them yourself When you need to replace a router component contact your customer support or sales representative to order the field replaceable unit FRU that contains the component For instructions see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 215 This
194. eadily Minor alarm condition requires monitoring or maintenance m ndicates a noncritical condition on the router that if eft unchecked might cause an interruption in service or degradation in performance m A missing rescue configuration or software license generates an amber system alarm Unlit Off No alarms 22 m For information about alarm conditions and corrective actions see Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 211 For additional information see the J series Services Router Administration Guide HA LED The HA high availability LED is for future use The LED lights when the router starts but otherwise remains unlit RESET CONFIG Button Use the RESET CONFIG button to return the router to either the rescue configuration or the factory default configuration The button is recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally To press this button insert a small probe such as a straightened paper clip into the pinhole on the front panel see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 For example if someone inadvertently commits a configuration that denies management access to a Services Router you can delete the invalid configuration and replace it with a rescue configuration by pressing the RESET CONFIG button You must have previously set the rescue configuration through the J Web interface or the CLI The rescue configuration is a previously committed valid configuration CAUTION Pressing and holding the RE
195. ed Guide user host gt set cli Possible completions complete on space Set whether typing space completes current word maximum idle time before login session ends directory Set working directory idle timeout Set prompt Set CLI command prompt string restart on upgrade Set screen length screen width Set Set whether CLI prompts to restart after software upgrade number of lines on screen number of characters on a line terminal Set terminal type Table 46 on page 96 shows how you can change the CLI environment features Table 46 Configuring the CLI Environment Environment CLI Command Default Setting Options Feature Command set cli on Pressing Tab or Spacebar m Setoffto allow only Tab for completion complete on space completes a command command completion on off m Set on to re enable Tab and Spacebar for command completion Your working directory set cli directory path8 cf var home remote Replace path with the directory you want to enter when you log in to the Services Router Minutes of idle time set cli idle time minutes Your session never times out unless your login class specifies a timeout m To enable the timeout feature replace timeout with a value between 1 and 100 000 m To disable the timeout feature replace timeout with O Your session prompt set cli prompt string user host gt Replace string with the prompt you want If the prom
196. edient draait de stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast Varoitus Varmista ett tasavirtapiirissa ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista Varmistaaksesi ett virta on KATKAISTU t ysin paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin k nn suojakytkin KATKAISTU asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin etta se pysyy KATKAISTU asennossa WARNING Attention Avant de pratiquer l une quelconque des proc dures ci dessous v rifier que le circuit en courant continu n est plus sous tension Pour en tre s r localiser le disjoncteur situ sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu placer le disjoncteur en position ferm e OFF et l aide d un ruban adh sif bloquer la poign e du disjoncteur en position OFF Warnung Vor Ausf hrung der folgenden Vorg nge ist sicherzustellen da die Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erh lt Um sicherzustellen da s mtlicher Strom abgestellt ist machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher f r die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS Stellung fest Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti verificare che il circuito CC non sia alimentato Per verificare che tutta l alimentazione sia scollegata OFF in
197. egulatory Compliance Information WARNING Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische instrumenten Pb WARNING Varoitus Ala katso s teeseen l k tarkastele sit suoraan optisen laitteen avulla WARNING Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux ni l observer directement l aide d instruments optiques WARNING Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Ger ten pr fen WARNING Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi n usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo direttamente WARNING Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter WARNING Aviso Nao olhe fixamente para o raio nem olhe para ele directamente com instrumentos pticos WARNING jAtenci n No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos pticos P ml i el gt b b WARNING Varning Rikta inte blicken in mot str len och titta inte direkt pa den genom optiska instrument Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning WARNING Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable is connected avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 271 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 272 m WARNING Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit
198. einer Situation die zu einer K rperverletzung f hren k nnte Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Ger t beginnen seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unf llen bewu t WARNING Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti WARNING Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan f re til personskade F r du utf rer arbeid p utstyr m du vare oppmerksom p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser inneb rer samt gj re deg kjent med vanlig praksis n r det gjelder unng ulykker WARNING Aviso Este s mbolo de aviso indica perigo Encontra se numa situa o que Ihe poder causar danos f sicos Antes de come ar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento familiarize se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos el ctricos com quaisquer pr ticas comuns que possam prevenir poss veis acidentes WARNING jAtenci n Este s mbolo de aviso significa peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad f sica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considerar los riesgos que entrana la corriente el ctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos est ndar de preve
199. eive the Crypto Module 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 3 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 4 Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle 5 Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis and slide the cover off the chassis 204 1H Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 6 Locate the Crypto Module on the system board see Figure 96 on page 204 7 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw as shown in Figure 97 on page 205 Figure 97 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Module Screw Release clips Remove screw 9003815 washer 8 Pullthe white release clips on either side of the Crypto Module out to either side as shown in Figure 98 on page 205 to tilt the Crypto Module upward Figure 98 Removing and Installing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module Remove Install Release clips 9003816 9 Slide the Crypto Module out of its socket 10 Remove the standoff washer that was under the Crypto Module 11 Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in t
200. em as necessary Table 47 Router Environmental Tolerances Description Value Altitude o performance degradation to 10 000 ft 5048 m Relative humidity ormal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5 to 90 noncondensing Temperature ormal operation ensured in temperature range of 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F on operating storage temperature in shipping carton 40 C 40 F to 70 C 158 F Seismic Designed to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake requirements Maximum thermal output J2320 chassis 1091 BTU hour 520 W J2350 chassis 1195 BTU hour 550 W J4350 chassis 1092 BTU hour 520 W J6350 chassis 1126 BTU hour 330 W Fire Safety Requirements Fire Suppression In the event of a fire emergency involving Services Routers and other network equipment the safety of people is the primary concern Establish procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency provide safety training and properly provision fire control equipment and fire extinguishers In addition establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire emergency Juniper Networks products must be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire safety and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you are installing and operat
201. ent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment CAUTION Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by themselves but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician as appropriate Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m 281 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide European Community iy Juniper NETWORK Declaration of Conformity Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA declares that under our sole responsibility the product s Services Router Model J2320 J2350 5G 320 5G 350 are in conformity with the provisions of the following EC Directives incbuding all amendments and with rational legislation implementing these directives Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EFC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and that the following harmonmed standards have been applied
202. enten nederst i kabinettet m Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr skal stabilisatorene installeres for montering eller utforing av reparasjonsarbeid pa enheten i kabinettet WARNING Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa estante dever tomar precau es especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um suporte est vel As seguintes directrizes ajud lo o a efectuar o seu trabalho com seguranca a O Juniper Networks router dever ser instalado numa prateleira fixa estrutura do edificio m Esta unidade dever ser montada na parte inferior da estante caso seja esta a nica unidade a ser montada m Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada coloque os itens mais pesados na parte inferior da estante arrumando os de baixo para cima m Seaestante possuir um dispositivo de estabiliza o instale o antes de montar ou reparar a unidade WARNING jAtenci n Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable Para garantizar su seguridad proceda segun las siguientes instrucciones m El Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del edificio m Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor cuando sea la nica unidad en el mismo Safety Guidelines and Warnings m
203. er bandwidth applications than ISDN BRI ISDN PRI consists of a single D channel for control and signaling plus a number of 64 Kbps B channels either 25 B channels on a T1 line or 50 B channels on an E1 line to carry network traffic uPIM Universal switching PIM A particular type of PIM such as the Gigabit Ethernet uPIM which can be universally inserted in any slot on a J2320 J2350 J4550 or J6350 Services Router PIM and VoIP Module Terms WM 45 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Field Replaceable PIMs PIMs are removable and insertable only when the Services Router is powered off You can install a PIM into one of the slots in the router chassis If a slot is not occupied by a PIM a PIM blank panel must be installed to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router This section contains the following topics m J2320and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary on page 46 m J4550 and J6550 Field Replaceable PIM Summary on page 47 m 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs on page 49 m 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs on page 52 m Dual Port Serial PIM on page 55 m Dual Port T1 or El PIM on page 56 m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM on page 57 m 73 or E3 PIM on page 59 m DualPort Fast Ethernet PIM on page 61 m 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM on page 62 m 4 Port ISDN BRI PIMs on page 63 m ADSL PIM on page 64 m GSHDSL PIM
204. er to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block 6 Within the terminal block remove the screws that fasten the power cable lugs to the terminal block 7 Carefully move the power cables out of the way 8 Slide the ejector tab on the power supply faceplate to the right and hold it in place to unlock the power supply 9 Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to start removing the power supply Slide it halfway out of the chassis see Figure 91 on page 198 10 Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis 11 If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot install a blank power supply panel over the slot Figure 91 Removing a DC Power Supply Ejector Installing a DC Power Supply Each power supply in a DC powered router must be connected to earth ground A ground terminal is provided on each DC power supply for this purpose To install a DC power supply see Figure 92 on page 200 198 1H Replacing Power System Components I Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads cannot become active during installation CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color cod
205. erator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The Crypto Module is a standard feature on J6350 Services Routers and an optional feature on the J4350 Services Routers Figure 96 on page 204 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 203 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 96 Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J4350 and J6350 Routers Crypto Accelerator Module 9003836 To modify a Crypto Accelerator Module configuration use the following procedures m Removing a J4350 or J6550 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 204 m Installing a J4550 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 205 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module a NOTE If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator Module into a J4350 Services Router for the first time proceed directly to Installing a J4350 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 205 To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to rec
206. erface Field sensitive Help Move the cursor over the question mark next to the field for which you want more information The system displays useful information about the field Typically this Help includes one line of information about what this field does or what you must enter in a given text box For example Help for the Peer Autonomous System Number field states the value should be a number between 1 and 65535 Context sensitive Help Click Help in the taskbar to open a separate page displaying the summary of all the fields on that page To exit Help close the page You can navigate Help pages using hypertext links connecting related topics or click the following options if available at the top and bottom of each page Figure 49 on page 88 shows Help for the CoS Configuration page m Prev Access the previous page m Next Access the next page a Report an Error Access a form for providing feedback Using the J Web Interface m 87 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J Web Sessions Figure 49 CoS Help Page Next Report an Error Configuring CoS with Quick Configuration The Class of Service Quick Configuration pages allow you to configure most of the JUNOS CoS components for the IPv4 IPv6 and MPLS traffic on a routing platform You can configure forwarding classes for transmitting packets define which packets are placed into each output queue schedule the
207. eries Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Encapsulation Ethernet m Media access control MAC encapsulation m 802 1p tagging m Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPOE m Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM for asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL or symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL Circuit cross connect CCC m Translational cross connect TCC Synchronous Point to Point Protocol PPP Frame Relay High level Data Link Control HDLC Serial encapsulation over RS 232 RS 449 X 21 V 35 and EIA 530 connections 802 10 filtering and forwarding Multilink Frame Relay Multilink PPP Data link switching DLSw License required Traffic Management Policing and shaping Class based queuing with prioritization Weighted random early detection WRED Queuing by virtual LAN VLAN data link connection identifier DLCI interface or bundle Ethernet Switching Access switching provided by multiport Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs J series Software Features and Licenses M 9 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Security Common Criteria Network attack detection Denial of service DoS and distributed DoS prote
208. ervices Router A WARNING This symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents A WARNING Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen Definition of Safety Warning Levels m 245 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 246 m WARNING Varoitus T m varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Olet tilanteessa joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan Ennen kuin ty skentelet mink n laitteiston parissa ota selv s hk kytkent ihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehk isykeinoista WARNING Attention Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement soyez conscient des dangers pos s par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents WARNING Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in
209. ervices Router Grounding lug Screw with Protective earthing captive washer point on chassis Washer Grounding lug Connecting DC Power A CAUTION If your J6350 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power supply connect each of the two power supplies to different input power sources Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to total power failure if one of the power supplies fails The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground For DC cable requirements see DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 108 To connect DC power to the router 124 HN Connecting Power Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Use a grounding cable to connect the router to earth ground For cable requirements see Chassis Grounding on page 121 a Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable lug to the grounding cable b Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the router is installed c With a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw and wa
210. ervices Router Getting Started Guide m Network administrators who install configure and manage Internet routers but are unfamiliar with the JUNOS software m Network administrators who install configure and manage products of Juniper Networks Personnel operating the equipment must be trained and competent must not conduct themselves in a careless willfully negligent or hostile manner and must abide by the instructions provided by the documentation How to Use This Guide J series documentation explains how to install configure and manage J series routers by providing information about JUNOS implementation specifically on J series routers For comprehensive JUNOS information see the JUNOS software manuals listed in Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii Table 1 on page xvi shows the location of J series information by task type in Juniper Networks documentation Table 1 Location of J series Information J series Tasks Location of Instruction Installing hardware and establishing basic connectivity Getting Started Guide for your router Configuring interfaces and routing protocols such as RIP OSPF BGP series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access and IS IS Configuration Guide Configuring advanced features such as virtual private networks VPNs J series Services Router Advanced WAN Access IP Security IPSec multicast routing policies firewall filters and class Configuration Gui
211. ervices Router Overview on page 4 m J2350 Services Router Overview on page 4 m J4350 Services Router Overview on page 5 m J6350 Services Router Overview on page 6 m J series Software Features and Licenses on page 7 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J2320 Services Router Overview The J2320 Services Router is primarily designed for remote or branch offices It has a small chassis that is 1 U rack unit in size with a nonredundant AC power supply an external compact flash and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J2320 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory The memory on J2320 routers can be upgraded to 1 GB For instructions on upgrading memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 190 Each J2320 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface The chassis also contains three slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya voice over IP VoIP modules providing flexible WAN and voice connectivity options The J2320 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 16 port m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port El P
212. ervices Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules J4350 Services Router Overview M 5 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 16 port m SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port m Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port El PIM m Dual Port TI PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m E3 PIM 1 port m DS3 T3 PIM 1 port m Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM m 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m GSHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports a TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J6350 Services Router Overview 6 m The 6550 Services Router is designed primarily for regional or central offices It has a chassis that is 2 U rack units in size with an optional redundant AC or DC power supply up to 2 GB of memory and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage The J6350 Services Router is a higher performance system than the J4350 Services Router J6350 routers come standard with 1 GB of memory and can be upgraded to 2 GB of memory For instructions on adding memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 190 Each J6350 chassis contains four
213. es and License Requirements Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Internet Protocols IPv4 IPv6 routing and forwarding J series Software Features and Licenses BM 7 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Routing and Open Shortest Path First OSPF Multicast Border Gateway Protocol BGP License required for advanced BGP route reflectors Routing Information Protocol version 1 RIPv1 and RIPv2 Static routes Intermediate System to Intermediate System IS IS Connectionless Network Services CLNS End system to Intermediate system ES IS protocol IS IS extensions BGP extensions Static routes Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS Layer 2 and Layer 5 virtual private networks VPNs VPN routing and forwarding VRF table labels Traffic engineering protocols m Label Distribution Protocol LDP m Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP Multicast m Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP m Protocol Independent Multicast PIM m Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP m Single source multicast IP Address Static addresses Management Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 8 W J series Software Features and Licenses Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers Table 5 Summary of J s
214. es terminales doivent tre de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent tre referm es sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur WARNING Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist sind zugelassene Verdrahtungsabschl sse z B f r einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelf rmig mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden Diese Abschl sse sollten die angemessene Gr e f r die Dr hte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen WARNING Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce usare connettori omologati come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l alto I connettori devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l isolante che il conduttore WARNING Advarsel Hvis det er n dvendig med flertr dede ledninger brukes godkjente ledningsavslutninger som for eksempel lukket sloyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbgyde kabelsko Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig storrelse i forhold til ledningene og skal klemme sammen bade isolasjonen og lederen WARNING Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalac o el ctrica de cabo torcido use termina es de cabo aprovadas tais como termina es de cabo em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima Estas termina es de cabo dever o ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos e dever o prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor WARNING jAte
215. ficate authority CA and an expiration date Secure Web Access Overview Before You Begin A Services Router uses the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol to provide secure management of Services Routers through the Web interface SSL uses public private key technology that requires a paired private key and an authentication certificate for providing the SSL service SSL encrypts communication between your router and the Web browser with a session key negotiated by the SSL server certificate An SSL certificate includes identifying information such as a public key and a signature made by a certificate authority CA When you access the router through HTTPS an SSL handshake authenticates the server and the client and begins a secure session If the information does not match or the certificate has expired you are not able to access the router through HTTPS Without SSL encryption communication between your router and the browser is sent in the open and can be intercepted We recommend that you enable HTTPS access on your WAN interfaces On J series Services Routers HTTP access is enabled by default on the built in management interfaces By default HTTPS access is supported on any interface with an SSL server certificate Before you begin initial configuration complete the following tasks m Establish basic connectivity See Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 129 152 HN Secure Web Access Overview Chapter 8 Configuring
216. fied remote host Side pane pa The receipt of such packets will usually result in the remote host replying with an ICMP echo response Note that some hosts are configured not to respond to ICMP echo requests so 4 lack of responses does not necessarily represent a connectivity problem Also sore firewalls block the ICMP packet types that ping uses 6 you may find that you are not able to ping outside your local network Entering host below creates periodic ping task that will run until cancelled or until it times out as specified Remote Host D E Advanced optione Juwiper yaw Net Bottom pane Main pane 9016741 82 1 Usingthe J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Elements of the J Web Interface This section summarizes the elements of the top pane side pane and main pane of the J Web interface Top Pane Elements The top pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 46 on page 83 Figure 46 Top Pane Elements Juniper Networks logo Hostname model 9016743 es Juniper ROUTER J6350 Monitor Configuration Manage Events ged 13 Help About Logout Taskbar with J Web tasks Usemame J Web Help About the J Web interface Logout m Juniper Networks logo Link to http www juniper net in a new browser window m hostname model Hostname and model of the Services Router m Logged in as username Username you used to log in to the Services Router
217. ge 124 e Secure the cable lug to the grounding point first with the washer then with the screw On J2520 and J2550 routers use the screw containing a captive washer to secure the cable lug to the grounding point 5 Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the router which has a plug appropriate for your geographical location For power cord specifications see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 4 Forthe power supply a Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate as shown in Figure 59 on page 125 through Figure 61 on page 124 b Insert the plug into an AC power source receptacle 5 Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people can trip on it 6 OnJ2320 and J2350 routers use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain on the cable see Figure 59 on page 125 and Figure 60 on page 124 a Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable and insert it into the opening on the tie b Pullthe end to tighten the tie To release the tie from the cable press down the tab on the tie and loosen it Figure 59 Connecting AC Power to the J2320 Services Router Grounding lug Screw with captive washer Protective earthing point on chassis Connecting Power m 123 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 60 Connecting AC Power to the J2350 S
218. ge 202 5 Remove the Crypto Module from its electrostatic bag 4 Align the notches in the Crypto Module with the notches in the connector on the system board and push the Crypto Module down flat as shown in Figure 95 on page 202 Figure 95 Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module Crypto Accelerator Module M Ed y o o o Connector 5 Insert the three screws and tighten them until snug Do not overtighten 6 Replace the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 7 Replace the power cord or cable 202 Mm Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 8 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 9 Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis hardware command as shown in the following example user host gt show chassis hardware user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis JN10B9C5AADD J2320 Midplane 003A 710 017558 TV1567 System IO 0004 710 017562 TV2095 J23X0 System IO Crypto Module Crypto Acceleration Routing Engine 0003 710 017560 TV1962 RE J2320 2000 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC If Crypto Module appears in the output the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed correctly Replacing Crypto Accel
219. ge 208 Figure 101 Inserting the Air Filter Tray on J2350 Routers 9004117 Air filter tray 8 Slide the tray fully into the air filter opening 9 Tighten the thumbscrew to the chassis Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers The front panel of J4350 and J6350 Services Routers contains an air intake grid with a protective cover and a filter as shown in Figure 102 on page 209 208 1H Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 102 Attaching Air Filter and Filter Cover Air filter Filter cover 9003819 Cover latches We recommend changing the filter every 6 months However the optimal filter replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is located If temperature alarms appear inspect the air filter To replace the air filter 1 Ov GBs Sa Remove the filter cover by squeezing the plastic tabs on either side of the filter cover Pull the filter cover away from the chassis Remove the old filter Place the new filter in the opening Replace the filter cover by pressing it until it clicks into place Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 209 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 210 1H Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Hardware Components This chapter contains the following topics m Chassis Alarm Conditions
220. ge 56 describes the meaning of the LED states Field Replaceable PIMs M 55 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 25 Status LEDs for Serial Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM 56 The Dual Port T1 PIM Figure 29 on page 56 and Dual Port E1 PIM Figure 30 on page 56 provide a physical connection to T1 or El network media types Each PIM has two physical T1 or E1 ports with an integrated channel service unit CSU or data service unit DSU Figure 29 Dual Port T1 PIM 9002331 port KU STATUS oo Qs os o S ECC A HG E FU porT 2 STATUS we por Le ei The Dual Port T1 and El PIMs provides the following key features 9002330 STATUS m Onboard network processor m Integrated CSU DSU Eliminates the need for a separate external device m 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps modes m ANSI TI 102 T1 107 and T1 403 standards compliance Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview m G 703 G 704 and G 706 El standards compliance m Independent internal and external clocking system m Loopback bit error rate test BERT T1 facilities data l
221. gement services for small to medium sized enterprise networks Services Routers typically connect small branch or regional offices to a central site router and link Internet service provider ISP networks All J series Services Routers run the JUNOS Internet software which offers many advanced routing and security services For more information about software features see J series Software Features and Licenses on page 7 A single common JUNOS code base simplifies deployment patches and software upgrades You can use two user interfaces to monitor configure troubleshoot and manage a Services Router m J Web interface A Web based graphical interface that allows you to operate a router without commands The J Web interface provides access to all JUNOS functionality and features Quick Configuration wizards simplify basic configuration and minimize the risk of operator error m JUNOS command line interface A Juniper Networks command shell that runs on top of a UNIX based operating system kernel The CLI is a straightforward command interface On a single line you type commands that are executed when you press the Enter key The CLI provides command Help and command completion For an introduction to the J Web and CLI interfaces see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 79 For more information see the J Web Interface User Guide and the JUNOS CLI User Guide This chapter contains the following topics m J2320 S
222. gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het rek is a Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert dient u het rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek m Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen dient u de stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft WARNING Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessa on noudatettava erityisia varotoimia jarjestelman vakavuuden s ilytt miseksi jotta v ltyt n loukkaantumiselta Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita m Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen m Jos telineess ei ole muita laitteita aseta laite telineen alaosaan m Jos laite asetetaan osaksi t ytettyyn telineeseen aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineell ja siirry sitten sen yl osaan m Jos telinett varten on vakaimet asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siin WARNING Attention Pour viter toute blessure corporelle pendant les op rations de montage ou de r paration de cette unit en casier il convient de prendre des Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 265 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 266 m pr cautions sp ciales afin de maintenir la stabilit du syst me Les directives ci desso
223. ght trip on it 15 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Removing a DC Power Supply The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis A power supply weighs 2 4 lb 1 1 kg To remove a DC power supply see Figure 91 on page 198 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 5 Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads cannot become active during installation Replacing Power System Components m 197 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide A CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply 4 Remove the power cables from the DC power source 5 Use a Phillips screwdriv
224. guration hierarchy options As you navigate through the configuration the hierarchy level is displayed at the top of the main pane You can click a statement or identifier displayed in the main pane or in the hierarchy in the left pane to display the corresponding configuration options in the main pane After typing or selecting your configuration edits click a button in the main pane described in Table 45 on page 87 to move to the previous page after applying committing or canceling the configuration An updated configuration does not take effect until you commit it Using the J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Table 43 Key J Web Edit Configuration Buttons Function Button Apply edits to the candidate configuration and return one level up previous OK page in the configuration hierarchy Clear the entries you have not yet applied to the candidate configuration and Cancel return one level up previous page in the configuration hierarchy Verify edits and apply them to the current configuration file running on the Commit Services Router Getting J Web Help The J Web interface provides two ways to display Help for the Monitor Quick Configuration Diagnose Manage Events and Alarms tasks For Help on the View and Edit configuration tasks see the related documentation provided in the Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii To get Help in the J Web int
225. hardware components When the CPU temperature reaches 80 C 176 F a yellow alarm is triggered When the CPU temperature reaches 105 C 2219 F the system shuts down There is no red alarm for temperature You can view the CPU junction temperature using the show chassis routing engine command The CPU temperature runs a few degrees higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor Chassis page of the J Web interface NOTE On J4350 and J6350 routers that are not designed to comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria the temperature at which the system shuts down is 90 C 194 F rather than 105 C 221 F To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output An additional fan is part of each power supply This fan is not regulated by the operating system J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 21 Airflow Through the J4350 and J6350 Chassis gt eeceoosoooo 003807 TT EE DON 3 Software Overview Each J series Services Router runs the JUNOS Internet software on its general purpose processors Designed for the large production networks typically supported by Internet service providers ISPs the JUNOS software incl
226. he RESET CONFIG button You must have previously set the rescue configuration through the J Web interface or the CLI The rescue configuration is a previously committed valid configuration A CAUTION Pressing and holding the RESET CONFIG button for 15 seconds or more until the STATUS LED blinks red deletes all configurations on the router including the backup configurations and rescue configuration and loads and commits the factory configuration You can change the default behavior of the RESET CONFIG button For more information see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports Four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces to hubs switches local servers and workstations You can also designate an Ethernet port for management traffic When configuring one of these ports you use the interface name that corresponds to the port s location From left to right on the front panel the interface names for the ports are ge 0 0 0 ge 0 0 1 ge 0 0 2 and ge 0 0 3 For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information see Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 236 Each port has two LEDs a TX RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right side Table 15 on page 35 describes the built in Ethernet port LEDs Table 15 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port
227. he bandwidth threshold that must be reached on all links before a Services Router initiates additional ISDN data connections to provide more bandwidth Basic Rate Interface BRI ISDN interface intended for home and small enterprise applications BRI consists of two 64 Kbps B channels and one 16 Kbps D channel callback Alternative feature to dial in that enables a J series Services Router to call back the caller from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection Instead of accepting a call from the remote end of the connection the router rejects the call waits a configured period of time and calls a number configured on the router s dialer interface See also dial in caller ID Telephone number of the caller on the remote end of a backup ISDN connection used to dial in and also to identify the caller Multiple caller IDs can be configured on an ISDN dialer interface During dial in the router matches the incoming call s caller ID against the caller IDs configured on its dialer interfaces Each dialer interface accepts calls from only callers whose caller IDs are configured on it channel service unit CSU Unit that connects a digital telephone line to a multiplexer or other signal service data service unit DSU Unit that connects a data terminal equipment DTE device in this case a Services Router to a digital telephone line data terminal equipment to data communication equipment DTE DCE interf
228. he chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Orient the USB storage device with the USB port on the front panel of the router Replacing USB Storage Devices m 189 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 5 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port If the USB storage device does not easily slide into the port it might not be oriented correctly Turn the USB storage device upside down and try again 4 To configure the USB storage device with the request system snapshot command see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Replacing DRAM Modules The DRAM installed on the Routing Engine provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes The design of the Routing Engine allows you to modify the DRAM configuration by adding DRAM modules to the system board or removing DRAM modules from the board The DRAM modules are located on the top of the system board as shown in Figure 86 on page 190 and Figure 87 on page 191 Two pairs of slots are available for installing DRAM modules Installing DRAM modules in slots away from each other provides better performance than installing them in two adjacent slots C NOTE Use only DRAM modules purchased through Juniper Networks specifically for your model Figure 86 J2
229. he electrostatic bag Installing a J4350 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module To install a Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Take the following steps if you have not already done so Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 205 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide a Si Si SN 10 a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 b Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off c Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle d Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis and slide the cover off the chassis Locate the Crypto Module socket on the system board see Figure 96 on page 204 The socket is tipped up at an angle when empty If a screw and standoff washer are already in place see Figure 97 on page 205 remove them Remove the Crypto Module from its electrostatic bag and insert it into the socket Push the Crypto Module down flat against the main board until the release clips click into place as shown in Figure 98 on page 205 Insert the standoff washer under the Crypto Module Insert the screw and tighten it until
230. he following access method is considered secure as any information sent over it will be encrypted before transmission Allow SSH Access v Before you configure the router gather the information described in Before You Begin on page 154 To configure basic settings with J Web Quick Configuration 1 If you have not already done so connect a management device to the ge 0 0 0 interface on port 0 0 For instructions see Connecting to the J Web Interface on page 155 2 Ifthe Set Up Quick Configuration page is not displayed select Configuration Quick Configuration Set Up 5 Enter information into the Set Up Quick Configuration page as described in Table 55 on page 1435 4 Click one of the following buttons m To apply the configuration and stay in the Set Up Quick Configuration page click Apply m To apply the configuration and return to the Quick Configuration page click OK 142 1H Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity a To cancel your entries and return to the Quick Configuration page click Cancel NOTE After initial configuration is complete the Services Router stops functioning as a DHCP server If you change the IP address of ge 0 0 0 and have the management device configured to use DHCP you lose your DHCP lease and your connection to the router through the J Web interface To reestablish a connection either set the IP address on the
231. he initial configuration of the router After you perform the initial configuration and commit it by clicking Apply or OK on the Set Up page the configured router can no longer act as a DHCP server Therefore in order to continue using it as a management interface you should configure the IP address of the interface as part of the initial configuration Management Access Telnet allows you to connect to the Services Router and access the CLI to execute commands from a remote system Telnet connections are not encrypted and therefore can be intercepted Telnet access to the root user is prohibited You must use more secure methods such as SSH to log in as root If you are using a JUNOScript server to configure and monitor routers you can activate clear text access on the router to allow unencrypted text to be sent directly over a Basic Connectivity Overview m 133 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Before You Begin 134 m Before You Begin TCP connection without using any additional protocol such as SSH SSL or Telnet Information sent in clear text is not encrypted and therefore can be intercepted For more information about the JUNOScript application programming interface API see the JUNOScript API Guide If the router is operating in a Common Criteria environment see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS SSH also allows you to connect to the router and ac
232. he rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle The AC power cord shipped with the router connects the router to earth ground when plugged into an AC grounding type power outlet The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation For power cord requirements see AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 107 To connect AC power to the router 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Use a grounding cable to connect the router to earth ground For cable requirements see Chassis Grounding on page 121 a Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable lug to the grounding cable b Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the router is installed Connecting Power Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router c With a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw and washer from the PEM nuts at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis d Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding point as shown in Figure 59 on page 125 through Figure 61 on pa
233. he same subnet NOTE To configure a backup router you must use the CLI or J Web configuration editor You cannot configure a backup router with J Web Quick Configuration Loopback Address The loopback address is the IP address of the Services Router The loopback address ensures that the router provides an IP address to management applications Because it must always be available to hosts attempting to route packets to the router the loopback address resides on an interface that is always active known as the loopback interface 100 0 Setting a loopback address ensures that the router can receive packets addressed to the loopback address as long as the router is reachable though any entry ingress interface In addition applications such as NTP RADIUS and TACACS can use the loopback address as the source address for outgoing packets If you use the J Web Set Up Quick Configuration page you can either set a loopback address of your choice or have the loopback address automatically set to 127 0 0 1 when you click Apply or OK to commit the configuration 132 Mm Basic Connectivity Overview Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Built In Ethernet Interface Address The built in Gigabit Ethernet interfaces ge 0 0 0 through ge 0 0 3 on the front panel of the Services Router are the interfaces through which you perform initial router setup The examples in this guide use the ge 0 0 0 interface as the management interface b
234. he standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this product is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment it may cause radio interference Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m 283 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide United States The Services Router has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Part 15 Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used
235. het Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings Ensure that the equipment rack into which the Services Router is installed is evenly and securely supported to avoid the hazardous condition that could result from uneven mechanical loading WARNING To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a rack take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following directives help maintain your safety m The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure m The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information m When mounting the router in a partially filled rack load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack m Ifthe rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the router in the rack WARNING Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren m De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden ge nstalleerd die aan een bouwsel is verankerd m Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek
236. his capacity is 50 if a combination of Avaya S8500 Media Server Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G550 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server The S8300 must reside in a G700 or G550 media gateway Therefore the maximum of 50 H 248 gateways supported by the 8500 means that only 49 of the 50 can be TGM550s Media servers that can be registered as 4 If an MGC becomes unavailable the Media Gateway Controllers MGCs on a TGM550 uses the next MGC on the list TGM550 The built in SLS module can be considered as a fifth MGC although its functionality is limited than that of a full scale media server Fixed analog line ports 2 Fixed analog trunk ports 2 TIM510 E1 T1 media modules 2 Up to two TIM510s can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router TIM5521 BRI media modules 2 Up to two TIM521s with 4 BRI trunk ports each can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router Avaya VoIP Modules M 71 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 36 TGM550 Maximum Media Gateway Capacities continued Hardware or Feature TGM550 Maximum Capacity Additional Information Digital signal processors DSPs 1 up to 80 channels The DSP supports 80 channels for calls using voice codec sets with 20 millisecond or higher packet sizes For calls with 10 millisecond or lower packet sizes the DSP supports 40 channels For TTY fax
237. hout the prior written consent of Juniper or I use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein 5 Audit Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement Upon request by Juniper Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement 6 Confidentiality The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper As such Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software for Customer s internal business purposes 7 Ownership Juniper and Juniper s licensors respectively retain ownership of all right title and interest including copyright in and to the Software associated documentation and all copies of the Software Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right title or interest in the Software or associated documentation or a sale of the Software associated documentation or copies of the Software 8 Warranty Limitation of Liability Disclaimer of Warranty The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty statement that accompanies the Software the Warranty Statement Nothing in this Agreement shall gi
238. ials Authorization RMA you must find the serial number on the router or component To list the router components and their serial numbers enter the following command line interface CLD command user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis 015810200500 J6350 Midplane REV 00 710 012339 System IO REV 00 710 012315 JX350 System IO Routing Engine REV 00 710 012151 RE J6350 3400 HW crypto Crypto accelerator FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC Se NOTE In the show chassis hardware command the PIM slot number is reported as an FPC number and the PIM number always 0 is reported as the PIC number Most components also have a serial number ID label attached to the component body Locating Component Serial Numbers m 215 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide The following sections describe the label location on each type of component m J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 216 m J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 217 m PIM Serial Number Label on page 218 m Power Supply Serial Number Labels on page 218 J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels J2320 and J2350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels located on the back of the chassis as shown in Figure 105 on page 216 and an agency label on the bottom of the chassis as shown in Figure 104 on page 217 Figure
239. ic Connectivity Terms Term Definition domain name Name that identifies the network or subnetwork of a router Basic Connectivity Terms M 129 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 54 Basic Connectivity Terms continued Term Definition Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network gateway Packets destined for IP addresses not identified in the routing table are sent to the default gateway hostname Unique name that identifies a router on the network loopback address IP address of a Services Router on logical interface loO 0 that is always active and available to external hosts and as the source address for outgoing packets Network Time Protocol NTP Protocol that provides a reliable way of synchronizing the system time of a router root user A superuser or system administrator who can perform any task in the file system secure shell SSH Protocol that provides a secured method of logging in to a remote network system Telnet Software that allows a computer to act as a remote terminal on a network system Basic Connectivity Overview To connect your Services Router to the network and establish basic connectivity you enter information about your network This overview contains the following topics m Router Identification on page 150 m Root Password on
240. ices connected to it To connect to the J Web interface through port 0 on the router see Figure 64 on page 156 and Figure 65 on page 157 1 On the management device such as a PC or laptop you use to access the J Web interface verify that the address of the port that you connect to the router is set to one of the following m An Ethernet address on the 192 168 1 24 subnetwork other than 192 168 1 1 m An Ethernet address from a DHCP server Turn off the power to the management device Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the management device Connecting to a Services Router m 135 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 136 m 4 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the built in Ethernet port on the router 5 Poweron the router by pressing the power button on the front panel 6 Waituntil the STATUS LED on the front panel turns solid green 7 Turn on the power to the management device The router assigns an IP address to the management device within the 192 168 1 0 24 subnetwork if the device is configured to use DHCP 8 From the management device open a Web browser and enter the IP address 192 168 1 1 in the address field The Set Up Quick Configuration page appears 9 Configure basic settings for your router as described in Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration on page 141 es NOTE You must manually configure the IP
241. icted access location When planning the electrical wiring at your site consider the factors discussed in the following sections Signaling Limitations Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference In addition the potential for damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances or if wires pass between buildings The electromagnetic pulse EMP caused by lightning can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices If your site has previously experienced such problems you might want to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding Radio Frequency Interference You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference RFI from your site wiring by using twisted pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors If you must exceed the recommended distances use a high quality twisted pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable Electromagnetic Compatibility If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility EMC particularly from lightning or radio transmitters you might want to seek expert advice Strong sources of electromagnetic interference EMI can destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the router and conduct power surges over the lines into the equipment resulting in an electrical hazard It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and t
242. ies in this product are not based on mercury lead or cadmium substances The batteries used in this product are in compliance with EU Directives 91 157 EEC 93 86 EEC and 98 101 EEC The product documentation includes instructional information on the proper method of reclamation and recycling Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m Canada on page 281 m European Community on page 282 280 HN Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements Canada Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information m Japan on page 285 m United States on page 284 This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 005 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 005 du Canada The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prev
243. imum number allowed on a chassis and sample interface names where applicable for the Avaya VoIP modules Avaya VoIP Modules M 67 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on On each J series Services Router with Avaya VoIP a single TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module TGM and at least one telephony interface module TIM is required No more than four TIMs of any kind can be installed on a single chassis Table 34 J2320 and J2350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering a Chassis type pim 0 port TGM550 m TGM550 JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots One required vp 3 0 0 Telephony Gateway 1 through 3 Gateway Module m J2350 Slots lf more than one See the interface Module m TGM550 1 through 5 TGM550 is installed naming conventions only the one in the in the J series Services lowest numbered slot Router Basic LAN and is enabled For WAN Access example if TGM550s Configuration Guide are installed in slots 2 and 3 only the one in slot 2 is enabled TIM510E1 T1 m TI
244. in to begin a new session To explicitly terminate a J Web session at any time click Logout in the top pane 88 Mm Usingthe J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Using the Command Line Interface This section contains the following topics m CLI Command Hierarchy on page 89 m Starting the CLI on page 90 m CLI Operational Mode on page 90 mw CLI Configuration Mode on page 91 m CLI Basics on page 92 For more information about the CLI see the JUNOS CLI User Guide CLI Command Hierarchy The CLI commands are organized hierarchically with commands that perform a similar function grouped together under the same level For example all commands that display information about the Services Router system and system software are grouped under the show command and all commands that display information about the routing table are grouped under the show route command Figure 50 on page 89 illustrates a portion of the show command hierarchy Figure 50 CLI Command Hierarchy Example show bgp isis ospf route system LL LL pe o E 5 brief exact protocol table terse E To execute a command you enter the full command name starting at the top level of the hierarchy For example to display a brief view of the routes in the routing table use the command show route brief The hierarchical organization results in commands that have a regular syntax and provides the foll
245. ing your equipment In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire first unplug the power cord For shutdown instructions see Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 127 104 1H Router Environmental Tolerances Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Then use a Type C fire extinguisher which uses noncorrosive fire retardants to extinguish the fire For more information about fire extinguishers see Fire Suppression Equipment on page 105 Fire Suppression Equipment Type C fire extinguishers which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide CO 5 and Halotron are most effective for suppressing electrical fires Type C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers dry chemical fire extinguishers near Juniper Networks equipment The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate which is very sticky and difficult to clean In addition in minute amounts of moisture monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals Power Guidelines NOTE To keep warranties effective do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control
246. ing Started Guide Limitations The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM has the following limitations m Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs do not support SNMP m Configure Gigabit Ethernet ePIM interfaces up to a maximum MTU size of 9018 bytes Installation You can install Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in any high speed slot as follows m j4550 Install up to two Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in slots 5 and 6 m j6550 Install up to four Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2 5 5 and 6 C NOTE High speed slots are labeled with an E on the front panel slot number diagram To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Interface LEDs The LINK and TX RX LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 25 on page 54 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 23 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving traffic Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving traffic For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Optical Interface Support Table 24 on page 54 describes the optical interface support on the SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM over single mode fiber optic SMF and multimode fiber optic MMF cables Table 24 Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM Parameter 1000Base SX Transceiver 10
247. ing for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 Using both hands slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop Make sure that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block Within the terminal block remove the two center screws next to the labels 48 VDC and RTN Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a power cable lug to the terminal block Using one of the removed screws secure the positive DC source power cable lug to the RTN terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw Using the other removed screw secure the negative DC source power cable lug to the 48 VDC terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 lb in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib
248. ing table Type a 32 bit IP address in dotted decimal notation Loopback Address Defines a reserved IP address that is always available on the router If no address is entered this address is set to 127 0 0 1 32 Type a 32 bit IP address and prefix length in dotted decimal notation ge 0 0 0 Address Defines the IP address and prefix length of ge 0 0 0 The interface ge 0 0 0 is typically used as the management interface for accessing the router The DHCP client sets this address to 192 168 1 1 24 if no DHCP server is found Type a 32 bit IP address and prefix length in dotted decimal notation NOTE You must enter the ge 0 0 0 address on the Quick Configuration Set Up page before you click Apply or OK If you do not manually configure this address you will lose your connection to the J Web interface when you click Apply or OK Management Access Allow Telnet Access Allows remote access to the router using Telnet To enable Telnet access select the check box Allow JUNOScript over Clear Text Access Allows JUNOScript to access the router using a protocol for sending unencrypted text over a TCP connection To enable JUNOScript access over clear text select the check box Allow SSH Access Allows remote access to the router using SSH To enable SSH access select the check box 144 m Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Con
249. ink FDL and long buildout diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for T1 and El PIMs see El and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts on page 237 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 26 on page 57 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 26 Status LEDs for T1 and E1 Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM The Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM Figure 51 on page 58 is a multiflex interface card that allows you to configure a single interface as a channelized T1 interface or a channelized E1 interface You can also configure ISDN PRI services on a channelized T1 or El interface The channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI interface supports up to 24 DSO channels on a T1 interface and up to 51 DSO channels on an El interface in addition to supporting the features of regular unchannelized T1 and E1 PIMs Each interface can be configured as a single clear channel fractionalized or channelized interface oe NOTE You cannot configure a channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI interface through a J Web Quick Configuration page Field Replaceable PIMS WM 57 J2
250. interface select Diagnose gt CLI Terminal in the J Web interface For more information see the J Web Interface User Guide 2 Login using your username and password After you log in you enter a UNIX shell 5 Start the CLI cli user host gt The presence of the angle bracket gt prompt indicates the CLI has started By default the prompt is preceded by a string that contains your username and the hostname of the router To exit the CLI and return to the UNIX shell enter the quit command CLI Operational Mode The CLI has two modes operational and configuration When you log in to the Services Router and the CLI starts you are at the top level of operational mode To view a list of top level operational mode commands type a question mark at the command line prompt user host gt Possible completions clear Clear information in the system configure Manipulate software configuration information file Perform file operations help Provide help information monitor Show real time debugging information mtrace Trace multicast path from source to receiver ping Ping remote target quit Exit the management session request Make system level requests restart Restart software process 90 1H Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview set Set CLI properties date time craft interface message show Show system information ssh Start secure shell on another host start S
251. internal compact flash is located at adO The external compact flash is located at ad2 The USB storage device is located at daO This example shows that the router booted from the internal compact flash If the show system storage output indicates that the router booted from the external compact flash you need to power off the router before replacing the compact flash 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 4 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash Skip this step if the router did not boot from the external compact flash see step 1 5 Gently grasp the USB storage device and slide it out of the USB port 6 Place the USB storage device on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Installing the USB Storage Device To install the USB storage device eS NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on t
252. ion but you must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration J Web Quick Configuration allows you to configure basic settings Figure 68 on page 142 shows the Quick Configuration page for basic setup Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration Mm 141 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 68 Set Up Quick Configuration Page Quick Configuration GE Identification Time Host Name routera gt Time Zone Americe Los Angeles D Domain Name lab router net NTP Servers 17217285 s Root Password eeeeecccce Verify Root Password eesceesecee Ada _Delete Current System Time 06 05 2007 18 21 Set time now via NTP Settime now manually Network Management Access DNS Name Servers 192 168 5 68 The following access methods are considered insecure as any 1721728101 information sent over them will be sent without encryption and 17247 28100 could possibly be intercepted during transmission Ada Delete Allow Telnet Access Y Domain Search i55 router net Allow JUNOScript over Clear Text Access Y router net Delete Default Gateway In order to enable HTTPS or JUNOScript over SSL you will need Loopback Address 10 157 89 183 32 to visit the SSL configuration page to configure certificates and associations ge 0 0 0 0 Address 10 157 90 183 19 T
253. ions on page 105 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 122 J2350 Power System 24 m The J2350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power The autosensing power supply see Figure 4 on page 15 or Figure 5 on page 16 distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC input 48 VDC and return and requires a dedicated 15 A 48 VDC circuit breaker The J2350 AC powered or DC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 122 de NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location J2320 and J2350 Cooling System The cooling system in J2320 and J2350 routers is from side to side The J2320 router has five cooling fans and the J2350 router has four c
254. ions the chassis includes the following features a Mounting brackets One pair of metal brackets can be mounted at the front or center of the chassis Use the brackets for mounting the chassis in a rack or cabinet m Earthing terminals Two protective earthing terminals PEM nuts at the rear of the chassis ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations m ESD point One electrostatic discharge ESD point a banana plug receptacle at the front of the chassis minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially hazardous environments A CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a functioning router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminals on the rear of the chassis are provided to connect the router to ground see Figure 14 on page 28 Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle For additional safety information see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 245 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features M 27 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 13 Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis Mounting Physical Interface Blank ESD M
255. iore SS WARNING Advarsel Bruk kun AWG nr 26 eller telekommunikasjonsledninger med storre dimensjon for redusere faren for brann WARNING Aviso Para reduzir o risco de inc ndio utilize apenas terminais de fio de telecomunica es N 26 AWG ou superiores P gt WARNING jAtenci n Para reducir el riesgo de incendios usar s lo l neas de telecomunicaciones de calibre No 26 AWG o m s gruesas A WARNING Varning F r att minska brandrisken skall endast Nr 26 AWG eller st rre telekommunikationsledning anv ndas Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during Services Router installation m Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 263 m Installation Instructions Warning on page 264 mw Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 264 m Ramp Warning on page 268 Chassis Lifting Guidelines The weight of a fully populated chassis is approximately 15 9 lbs 7 2 kg for aJ2320 Services Router 18 2 lbs 8 5 kg for a J2350 Services Router 25 5 lbs 11 5 kg for a J4350 Services Router and 50 7 Ib 13 9 kg for a J6350 Services Router Observe the following guidelines for lifting and moving a Services Router m Before moving the Services Router read the guidelines in Preparing for Router Installation on page 101 to verify that the intended site meets the specified power environmental and clearance requirements m Before lifti
256. king Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry such as rings bracelets or chains which could become caught in the chassis Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet environments Operate the Services Router only when it is properly grounded The separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product shall be permanently connected to earth Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 247 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 248 m m Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions are provided in this manual Such an action could cause severe electrical shock m Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame Such an action could result in electrical shock or fire m Avoid spilling liquid onto the Services Router chassis or onto any Services Router component Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the Services Router m Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that hav
257. kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord RTN till RTN 48 V till 48 V Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar 48 V till 48 V RTN till RTN jord till jord DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning WARNING When stranded wiring is required use approved wiring terminations such as closed loop or spade type with upturned lugs These terminations should be the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor WARNING Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is dient u bedrading te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten zoals het gesloten lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Varoitus Jos s ikeellinen johdin on tarpeen kayta hyv ksytty johdinliitantaa esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liit nt jossa on yl sp in k nnetyt kiinnityskorvat T llaisten liit nt jen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sek eristeen ett johdinosan WARNING Attention Quand des fils torsad s sont n cessaires utiliser des douilles terminales homologu es telles que celles circuit ferm ou du type plage ouverte avec cosses rebrouss es Ces douill
258. latory Compliance Information 245 Definition of Safety Warning Levels sssssssH cnn 245 Safety Guidelines and Warnings serait aiiin a iE AEE ee 247 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings onnnninnnnnnoncccconannccccnonnnrcccninnn 247 Qualified Personnel Warning oooconocccinnonocncccconnnocccnonn ai erai 248 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage sss 249 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings ssssss 249 General Electrical Safety Guidelines ooo ccccnononncccconn no nccinnnoo 250 AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines sssssee 251 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines sssssee 252 Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies cocino 252 DC Power Disconnection Warning eect ee eee cette eee ees 253 DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning i 254 DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning ees 255 DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning cece 256 Grounded Equipment Warning sssssssssse nana ncnnncnnnns 258 Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden sss 258 In Gasesot Electrical AGGIdent eios et oett t e bem nte ent 259 Table of Contents W xiii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning s 259 Power Disconnection Warning comarca enc ote ege peo ca 260 HN Rome WATER tacts 261 Telecommunication Line Cord Warning sssssss 262 Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings
259. lectrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software userhost gt request system halt Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Packing a Router or Component for Shipment Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware Shut down power to the router by pressing the power button on the front panel of the router Disconnect power from the router For instructions see Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 195 and Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 196 Remove the cables that connect to all external devices For instructions see Removing PIM Cables on page 177 Remove all field replaceable units FRUs from the router If the router is installed on a wall or rack have one person support the weight of the router while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws Place the router in the shipping carton Cover the router with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on top of and around the router Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam Securely tape the box closed Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking Packing Compone
260. liance statement JTAC Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center CONTACT Lis eu ses ete oet enr tute ques 214 contacting for hardware return sssss 218 information required for hardware return 219 Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center See JTAC JUNOS CLI EL terminal Se eie get tio ette 90 command Completion roi aaa 95 command hierarchy 89 command KR ue Le 80 command prompts See command prompts connecting localys acm tette tr eet connectitg remotely ace det dt repete t A aaant kah e e a AATA context sensitive help editing kevstrokhes neeunoksmii environment changing elle EEN managing Iecemses ds OVELVIEWM deu dd MALE LIA dd Screen llocs sereen WICK s usse eee ete teg SSN o isere ier a iRE ENEAN Er ER Val terminal PE te Ote ede WOFKING ditectoryz ucc E JUNOS Internet software establishing connectivity 129 establishing secure Web accesg 151 Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide VOESIOD s crit entiende iac Dent toes Pee as 81 lee 161 OVGEVIGWZ e tret e bete 59 Packet Forwarding Bngine 40 DpEOCESS S Leu cesi te reda attt Petite 40 telease notes URL ia eee dde XV Routing Engine ete ete cedes 40 worldwide version modifying Internet Explorer ie E 81 JUNOScope application JUNOScript API defining access Quick Configuration 144 enabling secure ACCESS 155 management access 154 verifying secure ac
261. linking Fast Ethernet port ACTIVITY LED state dual port PIM S opes eode eek eben ust Aden Ck 61 Fast Ethernet port link activity LED state 4 port CPIM ost tp at s 65 Gigabit Ethernet port LED cotes tertie 52 Gigabit Ethernet port TX RX LED STAC ii seta i de ici 25 55 54 ISDN BRI ONLINE LED starte 64 POWER LED state i oreet tee et 21 55 STATUS router LED state ooo 21 54 TIM514 ACT active LED starte 75 boot devices xime eee red vert 19 31 external compact flash esesman da 24 boot process backup router for 132 boot seguence 19 31 Border Gateway Protocol BGP route reflectors license as etd cat dM etur cuni dapi 162 bottom Panero teat esq beta 82 braces in configuration statements xviii brackets angle in syntax descrtptlons xviii square in configuration statements xviii BRI media module See TIM521 browser interface See J Web interface BTUS EE 104 built in Ethernet ports See Gigabit Ethernet ports buttons Apply Quick Configuration 86 Cancel J Web configuration editor 87 Cancel Quick Configuration 86 Commit J Web configuration editor 87 OK J Web configuration edito cnn 87 OK Quick Configaratiori co itm tete ts 86 jl 20 55 RESET CONEIG ed te taa 22 55 c cables AC power See AC power cords ADSL RJ 11 PINGUTUS M 240 arranging for saferv nica 177 Avaya VoIP 10 AWG replacement grounding EE 67 chassis cons
262. llot mukaan Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information lukien Metalliesineet kuumenevat kun ne ovat yhteydessa s hk virran ja maan kanssa ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liit nt napoihin WARNING Attention Avant d acc der a cet quipement connect aux lignes lectriques ter tout bijou anneaux colliers et montres compris Lorsqu ils sont branch s l alimentation et reli s la terre les objets m talliques chauffent ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l objet m tallique aux bornes WARNING Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Ger ten die an das Netz angeschlossen sind jeglichen Schmuck einschlie lich Ringe Ketten und Uhren abnehmen Metallgegenstande erhitzen sich wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden und k nnen schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlufklemmen angeschweift werden WARNING Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione togliersi qualsiasi monile inclusi anelli collane braccialetti ed orologi Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo pu saldarsi ai terminali WARNING Advarsel Fjern alle smykker inkludert ringer halskjeder og klokker for du skal arbeide pa utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger
263. logy basic connectivity sss 129 PIMS geeiert eet atate edible ases 44 secure Web access 151 TGM550 analog port Dlnouts rico 242 console port DIrIOUESz co ote t s 241 deScrpLUOTL s Leder eese sede essa teme GATE 69 maximum gateway C p cHies ee TI port LED States titanic POLES Mq Baer Cana telat ees tee asi a thermal QUEUE un qe prt pee rore tepido TIM510 descriptio r esee ee epa Bel get ee 75 Ed tr nk ports EEN 75 ports LED States jibes b pete len 74 RJ 45 connector port Dinoute ee 245 TA EROTIK POLS i ete crees Het bs ood ee otl 75 TIM514 analog Port pirotecnia esa 243 analog telephone porte 74 analog trunk POTS orci taa tada 74 descriptor etra uer OR eee gate Ee 74 port configurations sssssssss cnc 75 ports LED States cioe rode uel hes 75 TIM521 description soni ii 75 ISDN BRI connector port pinouts 245 ISDN BRI Ports sy oii e e esed 76 ports EED States oio aiat tes mm de 76 RJ 45 connector port Dinoute 245 time See system time A ian th tee a At tasa pae ut defining configuration editor defining Quick Configuration TIMs See TIM510 TIM514 TIM521 TN POWER SYSTEM EE 261 tolerances environmental 104 tools and equipment for component replacement 175 for hardware return 220 top pane JAW ebe Sens ege Mal RE SE SR wanna 85 traffic analysis renge steer eee 162 306 Hm Index troubleshooting a Services Router hardware components chassis alarm Co
264. m Type of activity being performed on the router when the problem occurred Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician a Return Materials Authorization RMA number is issued This number is used to track the returned material at the factory and to return repaired or new components to the customer as needed NOTE Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an RMA number Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA Refused shipments are returned to the customer via collect freight For more information about return and repair policies see the customer support Web page at http www juniper net support guidelines html For product problems or technical support issues open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 outside the United States When you need to return a component 1 Determine the part number and serial number of the component For instructions see Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 215 2 Obtain an RMA number from JTAC 5 Provide the following information m Part number and serial number of component m Your name organization name telephone number fax number and shipping address m Description of the failure Return Procedure M 219 J2320 J2350 J4350
265. mation services Firevenll DLSW Information E syslog S some Configuration hierarchy E protocols f J Web subtasks 7703 amp isis E ospf Esa EJ9 0 0 0 IPSec 016744 m Subtask Displays options related to the selected task in the J Web taskbar m Configuration hierarchy For the J Web configuration editor displays the hierarchy of committed statements in the Services Router configuration m Click Expand all to display the entire hierarchy m Click Hide all to display only the statements at the top level m Click plus signs to expand individual items m Click minus signs to hide individual items Navigating the J Web Interface The layout of the panes allows you to quickly navigate through the interface You navigate the J Web interface move forward and backward scroll pages and expand and collapse elements as you do in a typical Web browser interface From the taskbar select the J Web task that you want to perform Selecting the task displays related subtasks in the side pane When you select a subtask related fields are displayed in the main pane By default the system selects the first subtask and displays its related fields in the main pane The side pane and taskbar are available Using the J Web Interface m 85 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 86 m from all pages allowing you to skip from one task or subtask to the other from any page in the interface
266. mmand Line Interface Part 2 Installing a Services Router m Preparing for Router Installation on page 101 m Installing and Connecting a Services Router on page 115 m Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 129 m Configuring Secure Web Access on page 151 m Installing and Managing J series Licenses on page 161 Installing a Services Router M 99 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 100 Mm installing a Services Router Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Before installing a J series Services Router make sure that your site has the proper operating environment and equipment Use the checklist at the end of the chapter to help you prepare your site This chapter discusses the following topics General Site Guidelines on page 101 Rack Requirements on page 102 Router Environmental Tolerances on page 104 Fire Safety Requirements on page 104 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 Network Cable Specifications on page 112 ISDN Provisioning on page 112 Site Preparation Checklist on page 112 General Site Guidelines The following precautions help you plan an acceptable operating environment for your Services Router and avoid environmentally caused equipment failures For the cooling system to function properly the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted Ensure that there is adequate circulation in the installation location In J2520 and J2550 routers allo
267. ms or failures Red Disconnected Initialization of the PIM has failed Unlit Off PIM is booting STATUS Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Avaya VoIP Modules The Avaya VoIP modules are installed in a J series chassis like Physical Interface Modules PIMs but they are controlled by the Avaya Communication Manager software rather than the JUNOS Internet software A CAUTION PIMs and VoIP modules are not hot swappable You must power off the Services Router before removing or inserting a PIM or VoIP module Ensure that the PIMs and VoIP modules are installed in the router chassis before booting up the system CAUTION The grounding cable for J series routers must be at minimum 14 AWG cable For more information see Chassis Grounding on page 121 Avaya VoIP modules are described in the following sections m Avaya VoIP Module Summary on page 67 m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module on page 69 m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module on page 73 a TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module on page 74 m TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module on page 75 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Table 54 on page 68 and Table 55 on page 69 provide the module names software release information slot and port numbers max
268. n which the router is ocated In the Domain name box type the domain name of the router for example lab router net Set the domain name For example set domain name lab router net Allow SSH remote access 1 Inthe Nested configuration section next to Services click Configure or Edit 2 Next to Ssh click Configure or Edit 5 Click OK 4 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Set remote access for SSH set services ssh Define root authentication for access to the router NOTE For readability the entire key is not shown 1 Inthe Nested configuration section next to Root authentication click Configure or Edit 2 Next to Ssh rsa click Add New Entry 3 Inthe Authorized key box type the RSA password for example ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac root routera lab router net 4 Click OK 5 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Set the root password For example set root authentication ssh rsa ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac root routera lab router net Define the time zone the router is located in In the Time zone list select the time zone for your router for example America Los_Angeles Set the time zone For example set time zone America Los_Angeles 146 nm Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor Chapter 7 Establishing Basi
269. n DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 227 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 68 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 60 4 59 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A 1 6 2 Receive Data A 48 7 47 Request to Send A 5 8 6 Receive Timing A 37 9 38 Clear to Send A 41 0 Local Loopback 9 1 10 Data Mode A 55 2 34 Terminal Ready A 13 3 14 Receive Ready A 52 7 51 Terminal Timing A 36 9 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 59 22 60 Send Data B 55 25 56 Send Timing B 2 24 1 Receive Data B 47 25 48 Request to Send B 6 26 5 Receive Timing B 38 27 37 Clear to Send B 10 29 9 Data Mode B 34 30 33 Terminal Ready B 14 31 13 Receiver Ready B 51 35 52 Terminal Timing B 57 37 Send Common 26 to 25 18to 17 B 228 1H Serial PIM Cable Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinout Table 69 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 4 2 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A 60 6 59 Receive
270. n and conpecton 115 Man et taco reper e pr eoe te 175 PIM OVERVIEWS Aa pertes tb IRR des so gamers Heaney 45 product ONeTvlew nono nono nono Raa 3 replacing Components ieee ri 175 SE ga 215 troubleshooting Components oincciincccccnoccc nnnos 211 See also LEDs hardware features Avaya VoIP tmnodules suc ctr tete iine 67 COITIDOTIGTIS cir secessit to the rete voti tos front panel ceteras taa ederent product overview Hayes compatible modem See modem connection to router console port heat dissipation PIMs managing on stb ont e efto 110 troubleshooting ocn ii a io rico 212 help apropos Commande 95 Help deor 2 2L o mL Lr a sse EAM M aere 84 87 help reference commands eege oot e ctas 95 help topic commandar ise e tpe eet eere eed dp ane 95 Index Help J Web Interface 83 87 Helps JUNOS CLs his e op Meer CR a eH 95 high availability HA LED 22 35 high speed interfaces See ePIMs high speed slots for ePIMs Jocaton 55 ROSAS 1 2 d et ciate id Paste aee dl ose Rn 150 defining configuration dito 146 defining Quick Configuration 145 OVOEVIGWOS sevitae d deren ee tede n 130 See also DNS server Dog touse this guilde nette tet xvi HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol enabling Web access configuration editor 156 enabling Web access Quick Configuration 155 on built in management interfaces 152 verifying Conftguration 157 HTTPS Hypertext Transfer P
271. n be installed in high speed slots only High speed slots are indicated by a black triangle containing an E in the front panel slot number diagram On J4550 Services Routers the high speed slots are slot 5 and slot 6 On J6550 Services Routers the high speed slots are slots 2 5 5 and 6 Slot 0 is the fixed interface module that contains the built in Ethernet ports Power Button and POWER LED The power button is located on the left side of the front panel see Figure 19 on page 32 You can use the power button to power the Services Router on and off When you power on the router the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard Table 12 on page 55 describes the POWER LED Color State Description Green On steadily Power is functioning correctly Blinking Power button has been pressed and quickly released and the router is gracefully shutting down Unlit Off Router is not receiving power After the router is powered on status indicators such as LEDs on the front panel and show chassis command output can take up to 60 seconds to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds If you need to power off the router after the Routing Engine finishes booting use the J Web interface or the CLI to halt the Services Router first For instructions see the Jrse
272. n existing configuration you add statements to the configuration with the edit and set configuration mode commands For more information about the CLI configuration editor and configuration mode see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide and the JUNOS software configuration guides This section contains the following topics m Editing Keystrokes on page 92 m Command Completion on page 95 m Online Help on page 94 m Configuring the CLI Environment on page 95 Editing Keystrokes In the CLI you use keystrokes to move around on and edit the command line and to scroll through a list of recently executed commands Table 44 on page 95 lists some typical CLI editing tasks and the keystrokes that perform them 92 HN Using the Command Line Interface Table 44 CLI Editing Keystrokes Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Task Category Move the cursor Action Keyboard Sequence Move the cursor back one character Ctrl b Move the cursor back one word Esc b Move the cursor forward one character Ctrl f Move the cursor forward one word Esc f Move the cursor to the end of the command line Ctrl e Delete characters Delete the character before the cursor Ctrl h Delete or Backspace Delete the character at the cursor Ctrl d Delete all characters from the cursor to the end of he command line Ctrl k Delete all characters on the command line
273. n page 155 You can also connect to the CLI to configure basic settings For instructions see Connecting to the CLI Locally on page 137 and Connecting to the CLI Remotely on page 159 To use a configuration editor to configure basic settings 1 Navigate to the top of the configuration hierarchy in either the J Web or CLI configuration editor 2 To configure basic settings perform the configuration tasks described in Table 57 on page 146 Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor m 145 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide If you are using the J Web interface click Commit to view a summary of your changes then click OK to commit the configuration If you are using the CLI commit the configuration by entering the commit command Configurations on page 149 Table 57 Configuring Basic Settings To check the configuration see Displaying Basic Connectivity Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor avigate to the System evel in the configuration hierarchy 1 Inthe J Web interface select Configuration View and Edit Edit Configuration 2 Next to System click Configure or Edit From the edit hierarchy level enter edit system Define the hostname of he router In the Host name box type the hostname of the router for example routera Set the hostname For example set host name routera ame the domain i
274. nal compact flash is installed in a slot on the bottom of the J4550 or J6350 chassis see Figure 79 on page 183 ES NOTE Use only compact flash cards purchased from Juniper Networks for your J series platform and model Figure 79 Location of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash Compact flash drive Y Al N ON OOOOO0o0o00 Oooo0o0o0o00 i 2 Dg nu BZD q QS NO ES e 9003842 On some J4350 and J6350 Services Routers the compact flash is in a horizontal position while on others it is in a vertical position Figure 80 on page 184 shows the alternative horizontal orientation of the compact flash Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers 8 183 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 184 m Figure 80 Alternative Horizontal Orientation of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash H Compact flash drive ooo0o000g0 200000000 a D a wm S e 0 Es o DU ER o o SON vn penna dat Barn ang one noch
275. nalog Trunk TRUNK Port Configurations Configurations Wink start or immediate start DID trunk Loop start or ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 milliamperes mA to 120 mA Analog tip ring devices such as single line telephones Two wire analog outgoing centralized automatic message accounting with or without LED message waiting indication CAMA emergency E911 trunk for connectivity to the PSTN Multifrequency MF signaling is supported for CAMA ports The TIM514 also provides the following features m Three ringer loads the ringer equivalency number for up to 2 000 ft 610 m for all eight ports m Up to four simultaneously ringing ports m Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID m Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM514 see TIM514 Connector Pinout on page 245 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 174 TIM514 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 40 on page 75 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 40 LEDs for TIM514 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM514 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow Blinking Active A device connected to the TIM514 is in use This situation can include a telephone that is off the hook For more information about the TIM514 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and
276. nci n Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado utilizar terminales para cables homologados tales como las de tipo bucle cerrado o espada con las leng etas de conexi n vueltas hacia arriba Estos terminales deber n ser del tamano apropiado para los cables que se utilicen y tendr n que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 257 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 258 m WARNING Varning Nar flertr diga ledningar kr vs m ste godkanda ledningskontakter anvandas t ex kabelsko av sluten eller ppen typ med uppatvand tapp Storleken pa dessa kontakter m ste vara avpassad till ledningarna och m ste kunna halla bade isoleringen och ledaren fastklamda Grounded Equipment Warning WARNING The router is intended to be grounded Ensure that the router is connected to earth ground during normal use Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden Varoitus Tama laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi Varmista ett is nt laite on yhdistetty maahan normaalik yt n aikana Attention Cet quipement doit tre reli la terre S assurer que l appareil h te est reli la terre lors de l utilisation normale Warnung Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden Stellen Sie sicher da das Host Ger t wahrend des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist WARNING Avvertenz
277. nci n de accidentes Definition of Safety Warning Levels Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information A WARNING Varning Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete pa nagon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanligt f rfarande f r att f rebygga skador Safety Guidelines and Warnings This section lists the following safety guidelines and warnings for installing operating and maintaining a Services Router General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 247 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 249 Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 265 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 269 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 275 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the Services Router from damage The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before during and after installation Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while wal
278. nditions 211 offline PIMS css se canes eerte ORI er eet ee esa rae 212 power ManageMe eege esst ce eo ose 212 TRUNK and LINE ports on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 TRUNK ports TIM A soot eee ttt s 74 TST LED actinic eng a pi allt ida vn toe dere da 74 turning on a Services Router oooococccccccccccccicicncninicinno 127 TAR LEDS voten ti iii 23 35 54 Type C firex extinguisher Snia a e 105 types of configuration statements 92 U U port See ISDN BRI ports United States compliance statements 284 universal serial bus See USB Unpacking the TOU enean pe eee s 116 uPIMs Gigabit Ethernet See Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs URLs datasheets asd tende pvp testes telae PIM information and datasheets release NOTES eee US return and repair policies Deet USB universal serial bus storage device Imstalltmg 189 storage device removing cooooonocccccccoonccccccccnnnnno 188 storage device replachng 188 USB POLE a toe tt Pe tee T e ec eit 24 56 user interfaces J Web graphical user interface GUI 41 See also J Web interface JUNOS command line interface CLI 41 See also JUNOS CLI JUNOScope application 42 OVGOTVIGW s ots eddi ete eqs oe etat 19 preparation i n e aa i 80 SRG 8pplieatiOn e e rrt uN 42 V V 355 DCE Cable pinouts uut e bete 255 V35 DTE cable pinotits eed tee ems 232 ventilatio requirement cett etes quate rp eere 101 verification active licenses acos
279. nds To monitor diagnose and manage a router use the J Web interface or CLI operational mode commands Document Conventions Table 2 on page xvii defines the notice icons used in this guide Table 2 Notice Icons Icon Meaning Description ea Informational note Indicates important features or instructions A Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage A Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death LN Laser warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser Table 5 on page xvii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide Table 3 Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Description Examples Bold sans serif typeface Represents text that you type To enter configuration mode type the configure command user host gt configure Fixed width typeface Represents output that appears on the userGhost show chassis alarms terminal screen No alarms currently active Italic typeface m Introduces important new terms Identifies book names Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles A policy term is a named structure that defines match conditions and actions JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide RFC 1997 BGP Communities Attribute Document Conventions Wi xvii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 3 Text and Syntax Conventions continued Convention Descripti
280. nectivity Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor To establish basic connectivity on a Services Router you identify the router connect the router to the network and specify basic network settings In a typical network the Services Router has the basic settings listed in Table 56 on page 145 Determine the values to set on the Services Router in your network Table 56 Sample Settings on a Services Router Services Router Property Sample Value Services Router hostname routera Access for user root SSH RSA public key IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize system time on the Services Router 10 148 2 21 Services Router location Sunnyvale California USA which is in the America Los Angeles time zone IP address of the DNS server to which DNS requests are sent 10 148 2 32 Domains to which the Services Router belongs lab router net and router net IP address of a backup router to use while the Services Router is booting or if the routing protocol processes fail to start 192 168 2 12 24 Loopback IP address and prefix length for the Services Router loO interface 172 16 1 24 32 IP address and prefix length for the Services Router ge 0 0 0 interface 192 168 1 1 24 You can configure basic settings in the J Web interface from a device attached to the ge 0 0 0 interface on port 0 For instructions see Connecting to the J Web Interface o
281. net cable supplied with your router into the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter supplied with your router see Figure 66 on page 158 and Figure 67 on page 159 4 Plug the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter into the serial port on the management device see Figure 66 on page 158 and Figure 67 on page 159 5 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the console port on the router Figure 66 on page 158 and Figure 67 on page 159 6 Turn on the power to the management device 7 Start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal and select the appropriate COM port to use for example COM1 Connecting to a Services Router m 137 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 138 m 8 Configure the port settings as follows Bits per second 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 9 Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel Verify that the POWER LED on the front panel turns green The terminal emulation screen on your management device displays the boot sequence When the router has finished booting a login prompt appears 10 Log in as the user root No password is required at initial connection but you must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings Figure 66 Connecting to the Console Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers Serial port C
282. nfiguration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference JUNOS VPNs Configuration Guide Configuring Signaling Protocols for Traffic Engineering Configuring Virtual Private Networks Configuring CLNS VPNs Configuring IPSec for Secure Packet Exchange m JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Multicast Overview m JUNOS Multicast Protocols Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Configuring a Multicast Network Configuring Data Link Switching m JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Policy Framework Overview m JUNOS Policy Framework Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Configuring Routing Policies Configuring NAT m JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide SECH m JUNOS Policy Framework Configuration Guide Configuring Stateful Firewall Filters and NAT m JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide Configuring Stateless Firewall Filters m Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Class of Service Overview m JUNOS Class of Service Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference
283. ng or moving the Services Router disconnect all external cables m As when lifting any heavy object lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your back Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your body as you lift Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 263 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 264 m Installation Instructions Warning WARNING Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a power source Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de voeding verbindt Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen j rjestelm n yhdistamista virtalahteeseen Attention Avant de brancher le syst me sur la source d alimentation consulter les directives d installation Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen bevor Sie das System an die Stromquelle anschlie en WARNING Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema all alimentatore Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene for systemet kobles til stramkilden Aviso Leia as instru es de instala o antes de ligar o sistema sua fonte de energia jAtenci n Ver las instrucciones de instalaci n antes de conectar el sistema a la red de alimentaci n Varning Las installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess str mf rs rjningsen
284. ng routes and maintaining fowarding tables process Interface dcd Supplies the programs that configure and monitor network interfaces by defining process also physical characteristics such as link encapsulation hold times and keepalive timers called device control process Forwarding fwdd Responsible for most of the packet transmission through a Services Router The overall process performance of the router is largely determined by the effectiveness of the forwarding process User Interfaces The user interfaces on a Services Router interact with the management process to execute commands and store and retrieve information from the configuration database The user interfaces operate as clients that communicate with the JUNOS Internet software through an application programming interface APD The following primary user interfaces are shipped with the router m J Web graphical user interface Includes quick configuration capabilities for performing the minimum required steps to enable a feature plus a built in configuration editor with access to the entire configuration hierarchy to fully configure the router The J Web interface also provides tools for monitoring managing and diagnosing router operation m Command line interface CLI Grants access to the complete JUNOS command and configuration hierarchies to monitor the router diagnose problems and configure it completely Software Overview M 41 J2320 J2350 J43
285. nnector straight PINIOUUS Ss coro Phe ip tert E 259 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector crossover DIBOUES us de M ahs b LA Ls En red 258 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector straight PINQUES eegen eet eere t et ete ied i nent ee 258 RMA Return Materials Authorization 215 QUIN DED sce snos iier pectet P RR et s 219 packing a Services Router for shipment 220 packing components for shipment 221 EI ele c oo re dee PC e gute 219 tools and parts reouired 220 root password at initial local connection Imone occnnnnnincnnnnnoo 158 at initial remote connection one 141 Characteristics cinese li av or RR 151 Common Criteria limitations 151 defining configuration editort 146 defining Quick Configuratont 143 required to commit a configuration 151 route reflectors BGP Jiecense iinr aA 162 router See Services Router Routing Engine GEI tease uh Sete mette hy Mer Es fan failure J2320 functions and Components s 18 J2350 functions and Components s 18 J4350 functions and Components s 31 J6350 functions and components sss 31 REE Sach steele Aenea pot tec Bn sess arde oe pgs 40 IT CEET 212 midplane to PIMS einne ete tea 18 31 minor yellow aam 212 bead Or WEE COL 212 software COMPONENT non ccononnnnnccnns 40 TOO WaITU S ehhsteth qot ace ales 212 routing protocol software process 40 EPA DFOGBSS EE 40 RS 232 DCE c
286. nouts on page 236 m El andT1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts on page 237 m E3 and T5 BNC Connector Pinout on page 240 m ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout on page 240 m ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 241 m Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules on page 241 The 2 port serial PIM uses the cables and connectors summarized in Table 65 on page 225 Pinouts are detailed in Table 66 on page 226 through Table 75 on page 254 Table 65 2 Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors End to End Name Connector Connector Hardware Conductors Pinouts RS 252 DTE DB 25 male 4 40 threaded 15 Table 66 on page 226 jackscrews RS 232 DCE DB 25 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 13 Table 67 on page 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DC 37 DB 37 male 4 40 threaded 25 Table 68 on page 227 DTE jackscrews Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 225 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 65 2 Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors continued End to End Name Connector Connector Hardware Conductors Pinouts RS 422 449 EIA 449 DC 57 DB 57 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 25 Table 69 on page 229 DCE EIA 530A DTE DB 25 male 4 40 threaded 25 Table 70 on page 230 jackscrews EIA 530A DCE DB 25 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 22 Table 71 on page 231 V 35 DTE M 34 male Standard Normally 18 Table 72 on page 232 included with M 34 connector shell V 35 DCE
287. nsceivers see Figure 27 on page 53 Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Figure 26 Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 9003851 9003852 Features The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM provides the following key features m Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support m Link speeds for the Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM are configurable to 10 100 or 1000 Mbps and transmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex The SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM cannot be manually configured it is set at 1000 Mbps and full duplex m The SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM uses SFPs to allow different connectors to be used on the ePIM ports The ePIM supports 1000Base SX 1000Base LX and 1000Base T copper SFPs It does not support 1000Base LH SFPs 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics a Duplex LC PC connector Rx and Tx m Optical interface support See Table 24 on page 54 m Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM and 1000Base T SFP transceivers have the following characteristics m Connector Four pair category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable through an RJ 45 connector m Pinout MDI crossover Maximum distance 100 m 328 ft For pinouts of cable connectors for Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs see Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 236 Field Replaceable PIMs WM 53 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Gett
288. nse exists and that feature is configured the license is considered used Licenses Installed umber of licenses installed on the router for the particular feature Licenses Needed umber of licenses required for legal of use the feature Usage is determined by the configuration on the router If a feature is configured and the license for that feature is not installed a single license is needed Installed Licenses ID Unique alphanumeric ID of the license State Valid The installed license key is valid Invalid The installed license key is not valid Version Numeric version number of the license key Group If the license defines a group license this field displays the group definition If the license requires a group license this field displays the required group definition NOTE Because group licenses are currently unsupported this field is always blank Enabled Features Name of the feature that is enabled with the particular license Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface To add a new license key on a Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 25 In the J Web interface select Manage Licenses Under Installed Licenses click Add to add a new license key Do one of the following using a blank line to separate multiple license keys In the License File URL box type the full URL to the destination file containing the license key to be added In the License
289. nt of the chassis Data packets are transferred across the midplane from the PIM to the Routing Engine and from the Routing Engine across the midplane to the destination PIM J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware The Routing Engine consists of the following components For more information see Software Overview on page 59 m Processor Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router s routing tables and routing protocols m DRAM Buffers incoming packets and provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes To view the amount of DRAM installed on your router issue the show chassis routing engine command m EPROM Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine To view the serial number of the Routing Engine issue either the show chassis routing engine command or the show chassis hardware command m Crypto Accelerator Module Processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The cryptographic algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard AES Data Encryption Standard DES triple DES 5DES Hashed Message Authentication Code Message Digest 5 HMAC MD5 and HMAC Secure Hash Algorithm 1 SHA 1 To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your router issue the show chassis hardware command m Compact flash Pro
290. nt werden Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell unit eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo Advarsel Nar enheten installeres m jordledningen alltid tilkobles f rst og frakobles sist Aviso Ao instalar a unidade a liga o terra dever ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information jAtencion Al instalar el equipo conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la ultima Varning Vid installation av enheten m ste jordledningen alltid anslutas f rst och kopplas bort sist DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning WARNING Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs When connecting power the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground RTN to RTN then 48 V to 48 V When disconnecting power the proper wiring sequence is 48 V to 48 V RTN to RTN then ground to ground Note that the ground wire should always be connected first and disconnected last WARNING Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde RTN naar RTN en 48 V naar 48 V De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en 48 V naar 48 V RTN naar RTN aarde naar aarde WARNING Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon RTN varten RTN 48 V varten 48 V Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on 48 V varten 48 V R
291. nte il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa unit in un supporto occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza personale m I Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio il quale deve essere fissato alla struttura dell edificio m Questa unit deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto se si tratta dell unica unit da montare nel supporto a Quando questa unit viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno caricare il supporto dal basso all alto con il componente pi pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto m Se il supporto dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti installare tali dispositivi prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell unit nel supporto Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Advarsel Unnga fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid pa denne enheten nar den befinner seg i et kabinett V r n ye med at systemet er stabilt Felgende retningslinjer er gitt for verne om sikkerheten m Juniper Networks router m installeres i et stativ som er forankret til bygningsstrukturen m Denneenheten ber monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i kabinettet a Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt skal kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste kompon
292. ntries International Electromechanical Commission IEC 60364 Part 1 through Part 7 Evaluated to the TN power system m Locate the emergency power off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical accident occurs you can quickly turn off the power a Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace m Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit Always check the circuit before starting to work m Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area such as moist floors ungrounded power extension cords and missing safety grounds m Operate the Services Router within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions m For the Services Router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment and make certain they are in good condition Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Many Services Router components can be removed and replaced without powering down or disconnecting power to the Services Router as detailed in elsewhere in this manual Never install equipment if it appears damaged AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC powered routers AC powered routers are shipped with a three wire electrical cord with a grounding type plug that fits only a gro
293. nts for Shipment To pack and ship individual components follow these guidelines When you return components make sure they are adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton Use the original shipping materials if they are available Place individual boards in electrostatic bags Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking A CAUTION Do not stack any of the router components Packing a Router or Component for Shipment mM 2212 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 222 1H Packing a Router or Component for Shipment Part 4 J series Requirements and Specifications m Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 m Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 245 J series Requirements and Specifications Mm 223 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 224 HN Jseries Requirements and Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Serial PIM Cable Specifications The network interfaces supported on the router accept different kinds of network cable m Serial PIM Cable Specifications on page 225 m Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 235 m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 235 m Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 256 m Chassis Console Port Pi
294. o tions basic connectivity license usage e Secure ACCES Sh ea EE version licens KEY eege ras asista ok ttd voice over IP See Avaya VoIP modules VoIP See Avaya VoIP modules W warnings battery Handling srein gege 273 DC poWer cables inci eei eee 252 DC power dsconnecton creeren 255 DC power plant and chassis ground 109 DC wiring seguence e205 DC wiring terminations coer nre inn 256 DC powered J4350 and J6350 routers restricted access installation only ooo 106 earthed mains socket Norway and Sweden En EE 258 electrical cese ette e pete pente eet sath en 249 ESD strap to prevent router damage 27 follow lifting guidelimnes ee 117 119 generali aiie ete betreten brat 247 grounded egutpment ce eeeeeeeees 258 installation cete ais eee eec 265 jewelry ul EE iana 274 laser and LED virreinal itr I e ARIS 269 levels dedito 245 lightening zactiVibys et ert tet eec 276 maintenance and operational 275 multiple power supply disconnection 259 operating temperature cie sees personnel s cde MS oet power disconnection aene E aa product disposal rack mounting requirements A O read installation instructions restricted access location for DC powered A Tete 25 37 38 117 118 rotating fans compact flash replacement sett te AAE 181 184 safe rack order for multiple routers 117 119 telecommunications Ines 262 TNS POWELSVSCE NI
295. o use electrical surge suppression devices A CAUTION To comply with intrabuilding lightning surge requirements intrabuilding wiring must be shielded and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both ends Router Power Requirements 106 m Table 48 on page 107 and Table 49 on page 107 list the AC and DC power system electrical specifications for J series Services Routers Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Table 48 AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J2320 and J2350 Routers Item Specification AC input voltage 100 to 240 VAC nominal AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz AC system current rating J2320 Services Routers 5 2 A to 1 5 A J2350 Services Routers 5 5 A to 1 5 A DC input voltage 48 to 60 VDC operating range DC system current rating 72A Table 49 AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J4350 and J6350 Routers Item Specification AC input voltage 100 to 240 VAC nominal AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz AC system current rating J4350 Services Routers 6 A J6350 Services Routers 8 A DC input voltage 48 to 60 VDC operating range DC system current rating 20A AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications ce NOTE The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router only and not for any other use
296. oIP Module Overview Services Router User Interface Overview Installing a Services Router Preparing for Router Installation Installing and Connecting a Services Router Establishing Basic Connectivity Configuring Secure Web Access Installing and Managing J series Licenses Maintaining Services Router Hardware Replacing Hardware Components Troubleshooting Hardware Components Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware J series Requirements and Specifications Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Index Index Abbreviated Table of Contents XV 13 43 79 101 115 129 151 161 173 211 215 225 245 289 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide vi m Table of Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 About This Guide xv leen rM sU XV AUGIerCe oct xt hs det thot tt hens cer a ceo ents how ead cel ig E old XV How to Use THis GUISA EA es xvi Document CONVENTIONS e db ett de ie gedet eegend etse ete iens xvii Related Juniper Networks Documentation ssss xviii Documentation Feedback xe noe teer te ebbe beret xxi REQUESTING SUD POPs cecal aie E AO Hee eee e eut teda dns dit ee xxi J series Overview Overview of Services Routers 3 J2320 Services Router e 4 2350 Services Router OVERVIEW enee oem fg ex ied etat ef eite ed eel lode s 4 J4550 Services Router OVEIVIEW serre rer ette o Ee
297. ole port DB 9 connector PINOULSS eeh 257 chassis console port RJ 45 connector PINOS retracto opina 236 connecting to network media 121 console port cable chassis CODTIe cti ocio tct TEENE ERR 157 140 console port cable chassis replacing 174 DC cables See DC power cables disconnecting PIM cables 177 E1 RJ 48 pilots ptt eremi 237 Ethernet cable connecting 155 157 140 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinout 255 Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinouts e PIN rc deat te EDT ee nun 256 Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinouts UBIMS por Esa Ma Em eddie smt add 255 SOU us cem tpe irae te gere HH XS 121 ISDN R 45 pifioUts iin cen tre tete 241 PIM installing teas ee tne cens 177 BIM LEMOVING sisse stes rere resp peer sa 177 reducing radio frequency interference RFI 106 serial EIA 550A DCE pinouts 5 231 serial EIA 550A DTE pinouts 250 serial PIM specifications 2225 serial RS 232 DCE pinouts eet serial RS 232 DTE pinouts 226 serial RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE pinouts 229 serial RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE pinouts 227 serial V 55 DCE pinouts 235 serial V 35DTE PIQUE ces tetti Te tenes 252 serial X321 DCE pin OUts sis eoe scere a 254 serial X 2I Uer a oe ttt etin 255 SHDSE RJSLI pinouts ss i der eee 240 TI RJAS PIN QUe erro t eet 257 TGM550 analog pinouts 242 TGM550 console port DB 9 connector PIQUE e
298. ompany may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service 284 HW Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information If trouble is experienced with this equipment or for repair or warranty information please follow the applicable procedures explained in the Technical Support section of this manual m FCC Registration Number See label on product m Required Connector USOC RJ 48C m Service Order Code SOC 6 ON Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m 285 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 286 HW Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Part 5 Index m Index on page 289 Index mM 287 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 288 HW index Index Symbols comments in configuration statements xviii configuration mode command prompt 91 in syntax descriptions xviii red asterisk sce tete EE 84 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM eti testo testet 62 4 Port ISDN BRI S T PIM descriptions 4 ecce dns ted eee ite es Aus sles 65 PIM ONLINE LED euer ttt do erc 64 4 Port ISDN BRI U PIM descriptionBn se ccc e abad e eee 65 PIM ONLIN
299. on Examples Italic sans serif typeface Represents variables options for which you substitute a value in commands or configuration statements Configure the machine s domain name edit root set system domain name domain name Sans serif typeface Represents names of configuration statements commands files and directories IP addresses configuration hierarchy levels or labels on routing platform components m To configure a stub area include the stub statement at the edit protocols ospf area area id hierarchy level m The console port is labeled CONSOLE angle brackets Enclose optional keywords or variables stub default metric metric pipe symbol Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity broadcast multicast string1 string2 string3 pound sign Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration statement to which it applies rsvp Required for dynamic MPLS only square brackets Enclose a variable for which you can substitute one or more values community name members community ids Indention and braces Identify a level in the configuration hierarchy semicolon Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level edit routing options st
300. on Editor 156 Verifying Secure Web ACCESS i oo eee teret tl e pe diz 157 Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration aieas iad 158 Displaying a Secure Access Configuration ssssssse 159 Installing and Managing J series Licenses 161 E EE 161 Software Feature Licenses tse ts er ote west rm PLoS ere 161 License Key COMPONENtS ged sn ina ast tes a dto undis 162 Belore Y oU EE 162 Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface 0 0 0 0 eens 165 Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface 00 eee 164 Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface ssssssssss m 165 Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface 165 Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface 165 Managing J series Licenses with ec 165 Adding New Licenses with bell 165 Deleting aLicense with Eer uei de t ro rn ete tet ecd 166 Saving License Keys with ec 166 Verifying J series License Management 167 Displaying Installed LICENSE She renerien eai a aaia E 168 Displaying License Usage ete ste doe ote ax E AAN td 169 Displaying Installed License bes 169 Maintaining Services Router Hardware Replacing Hardware Components 173 Tools and Parts Requited xu ua te geb Rr NN edt 175 Replacing the Console Port Cable gei nia emaa aa n nano n cnn nono 174 Replacing a PIM 525 tatio eet ete t aede Ph rel ecc t phe n ines 174 REMOVING a PIMA doute er m NA 174 Installing a PIM aot tette t t bete tette Ree e 176 Table of Contents W Xi
301. on about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 122 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features M 37 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Power supplies on J6350 Services Routers are hot removable and hot insertable You can remove and replace a redundant power supply without powering down the router or disrupting the routing functions To avoid electrical injury carefully follow the instructions in Replacing Power System Components on page 195 NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location J4350 and J6350 Cooling System 38 m The cooling system includes three fans at the rear of the chassis The airflow produced by these fans keeps router components within the acceptable temperature range see Figure 21 on page 39 The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according to the current temperature An air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and must be replaced periodically For instructions see Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 208 The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components If the maximum temperature specification as measured at the CPU junction is exceeded and the router cannot be adequately cooled the Routing Engine shuts down the
302. on the J2320 and J2350 chassis 1 Lower the cover onto the chassis so that the front edge of the cover is a few inches away from the front edge of the chassis base see Figure 74 on page 179 2 Tilt the cover and align the rear tabs with the slots at the bottom of the chassis see Figure 75 on page 180 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers m 179 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 75 Matching the Chassis Slots and Tabs 2 a y s S gt 3 Lower the cover fully onto the base and slide it so that the front tabs match the front slots and the chassis cover and base edges align completely 4 Insert and tighten the flat head screws with a Phillips screwdriver 5 Return the router to its installation site and attach the grounding cable and the power cables See Connecting Power on page 122 6 Pressand release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers The internal compact flash provides primary storage for the router and is installed in a slot on the bottom of the J2320 or J2350 chassis see Figure 76 on page 181 It can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode For information about configuring the internal compact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide C NOTE Use only compact flash c
303. onnecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Figure 67 Connecting to the Console Port on J4350 and J6350 Routers Serial port RJ 45 rollover cable Connecting to the CLI Remotely You can connect to the CLI from a remote location through two dial up modems a modem that is connected to the console port on the Services Router and a second modem connected to a remote management device The modem connection allows you to remotely perform the same console operations you can perform locally This section contains the following topics Configuring the Modem at the Router End on page 139 mw Connecting the Modem to the Console Port on page 140 m Connecting to the CLI at the User End on page 141 Configuring the Modem at the Router End m NOTE These instructions use Hayes compatible modem commands to configure the modem If your modem is not Hayes compatible refer to the documentation for your modem and enter equivalent modem commands Before you can connect a dial up modem to the console port on the Services Router you must configure the modem to accept a call on the first ring and accept Data Terminal Ready DTR signals You must also disable flow control on the modem To configure the modem on the router end 1 Connect the modem to a PC or laptop computer 2 Power on the modem Connecting to a Services Router M 139 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started G
304. ons services Perform service application operations support Perform JUNOS support tasks system Perform system level operations user host gt request m Type a question mark in the middle of a command name The CLI lists possible command completions that match the letters you have entered so far then redisplays the letters that you typed For example to list all operational mode commands that start with the letter s type the following user host gt s Possible completions set Set CLI properties date time craft interface message show Show system information ssh Start secure shell on another host start Start shell user host gt s Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview When you enter the help commands described in Table 45 on page 95 the CLI displays usage guidelines and summary information for configuration statements and operational mode commands You can enter help commands in operational or configuration mode Table 45 help Commands CLI Command Description help apropos string Displays help based on a text string contained in a statement or command name If the string contains spaces enclose it in quotation marks You also can specify a regular expression for the string using standard UNIX style regular expression syntax In configuration mode this command displays statement names and help text that match the string specified In operational mode
305. ooling fans The fans draw air through vents along the left side of the chassis and exhaust it through vents on the right side of the chassis The airflow produced by these fans keeps router components within the acceptable temperature range see Figure 11 on page 26 and Figure 12 on page 26 The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according to the current temperature On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria an air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and must be replaced periodically To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output For instructions on how to replace air filters see Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers on page 207 The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components If the maximum temperature specification as measured at the CPU junction is exceeded and the router cannot be adequately cooled the Routing Engine shuts down the hardware components J2320 and J2350 routers shut down when the CPU temperature reaches 80 C 1769F There is no alarm for temperature You can view the CPU junction temperature using the show chassis routing engine command The CPU temperature runs a few degrees higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor Chassis page of the J Web interface An additional fan is
306. oot from an alternative boot device contact JTAC See Requesting Support on page xxi Chassis Alarm Conditions m 241 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 64 Chassis Alarm Conditions and Corrective Actions continued Component Alarm Conditions Corrective Action Alarm Severity PIM A PIM has failed When a PIM fails it attempts to reboot If the Routing Engine detects that a PIM is rebooting too often it shuts down the PIM Replace the failed PIM See Replacing a PIM on page 174 Red major Routing Engine An error occurred during the process of reading or writing compact flash Reformat the compact flash and install a bootable image See the J series Services Router Administration Guide If this remedy fails you must replace the failed Routing Engine To contact JTAC see Requesting Support on page xxi Yellow minor Routing Engine temperature is too warm Check the room temperature See Router Environmental Tolerances on page 104 Check the air flow See General Site Guidelines on page 101 Check the fans See J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 and J4350 and J6550 Cooling System on page 58 If you must replace a fan or the Routing Engine contact JTAC See Requesting Support on page xxi Check the air filter and replace it if it appears clogged See Replacing Air Filters on J2550
307. opposite side and that the router is level 6 Install the second screw in each mounting bracket Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location 118 Mm Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router You can center mount or front mount the J4350 and J6550 Services Routers in a rack In general a center mount rack is preferable to a front mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center mount rack provides greater stability Many types of racks are acceptable including four post telco racks enclosed cabinets and open frame racks For more information about the type of rack or cabinet the J series router can be installed into see Rack Requirements on page 102 WARNING If you are installing multiple routers in one rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward in the rack Install heavier routers in the lower part of the rack The router must be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack WARNING The chassis weighs between 23 Ib 10 4 kg and 30 7 Ib 13 9 kg Read and follow the lifting guidelines in Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 265 To install the J4350 and J6350 router into a rack 1 Attach the mounting brackets to the sides of the chassis see Figure 55 on page 119 You can position the brackets either in
308. or Module 201 Installing a J2520 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module 202 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6550 Routers 205 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module 204 Installing a J4550 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module ona 205 Replacing Air Filters on 2550 Routers er irni anoet aa non n cnn nncnnnns 207 Replacing Air Filters on J4550 and J6550 Routers eccerre 208 Troubleshooting Hardware Components 211 Chassis AlarmConditiOFls xo isti to etr ep MR Epia dis 211 Troubleshooting Power Management 212 Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center 214 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware 215 Locating Component Serial Numbers sssssssssss nano noncnnn ns 215 J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels 216 J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels 217 PIM Serna Number tabel vs ata tt ege SEN deed 218 Power Supply Serial Number Labele 218 Contacting Customer Support eee eee een 218 Information You Might Need to Supply ona 219 Ret Procedur eebe En AS e s EE m 219 Packing a Router or Component for Shipment sss 220 Tools and Parts Required e Et entire de e pete 220 Packing the Services Router for Shipment oecrenuurearenine kine 220 Packing Components for SNIPEN ee 221 Part 4 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Table of Contents J series Requirements and Specifications Ne
309. ore hardware components have exceeded emperature thresholds m An alarm condition configured on an interface has riggered a critical warning Yellow On steadily Minor alarm condition requires monitoring or maintenance E ndicates a noncritical condition on the router that if eft unchecked might cause an interruption in service or degradation in performance m A missing rescue configuration or software license generates a yellow system alarm Unlit Off No alarms For information about alarm conditions and corrective actions see Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 211 For additional information see the J series Services Router Administration Guide 34 W J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview HA LED The HA high availability LED is for future use The LED lights when the router starts but otherwise remains unlit RESET CONFIG Button Use the RESET CONFIG button to return the router to either the rescue configuration or the factory default configuration The button is recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally To press this button insert a small probe such as a straightened paper clip into the pinhole on the front panel see Figure 19 on page 52 For example if someone inadvertently commits a configuration that denies management access to a Services Router you can delete the invalid configuration and replace it with a rescue configuration by pressing t
310. orming the initial configuration with the J Web interface collect the following equipment A management device such as a laptop with an Ethernet port Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity m An Ethernet cable provided If you are performing the initial configuration with the CLI collect the following equipment m A management device such as a PC or laptop with a serial port and an asynchronous terminal application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal m An RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter provided m An Ethernet cable provided m Foraremote connection two dial up modems m Foraremote modem connection a DB 9 female to DB 25 male adapter or other adapter appropriate for your modem not provided Connecting to a Services Router You can connect to the Services Router using the J Web or CLI interface This section contains the following topics Connecting to the J Web Interface on page 155 Connecting to the CLI Locally on page 157 Connecting to the CLI Remotely on page 159 Connecting to the J Web Interface If you plan to use the J Web interface to configure the Services Router you must connect through one of the built in Ethernet management ports as shown in Figure 64 on page 156 and Figure 65 on page 157 When the Services Router is powered on for the first time the system looks for a DHCP server and if it does not find one it assigns an IP address within the 192 168 1 0 24 subnetwork to any dev
311. ort Fast Ethernet ERIM seient a aea 62 4 Port ISDN BRI S T PIM 65 4 Port ISDN BRI U PIM eee eee HH 65 ADS PIM icemar desn A tl a 64 air tilterzzeplacitig ote xe eer rto 208 Avaya VoIP modules 67 DOOTEVICES es d Le eee Mieres 51 DOOt SEQUENCE scorso pte Lote e pe CH RET EROS 51 CASSIS care eost d ede REED OR NAE 27 cooling Si e or e es 58 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 Dual Port E1 PIM falls tip citati bet AS front panel Laud eed ets e ERUS Teplacinge aiiidere b ite t eed ER EE RE Gigabit Ethernet PlM ono 52 Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs ssssss 49 Hard WaTe salen ege modes eret patebit 26 hardware Components cooooccccccoooocncccccoonnnnnccncoonnnno 30 Index J6350 hardware replaeirg scu onset dette 175 installatiOri EE 118 interfaces Supported ceo tpe meg ere 47 mounting brackets Installmg ee 119 OMC Wal tes Mussa ed lit t E 5 physical specftcationg 50 PIM OVSIVIEW coser tee ette tette testes 46 PIMS SUP POLE dim cna aladdin 47 ports SUDDOFIGQ c cett ro tete ente 47 power managemlent eee bebo eet 110 POWER SYSTEM ie aigle Seegen 56 restricted access installation 25 57 58 118 Routing Engine bardware 31 TGMS550 5 t M beret A 69 DEEST s netter eos rtt dete TR SEES 73 STAM Abe en cee etta egeta 74 MM SZ lia casts uh ene EE 75 USB POLE scorre tr e e ORE C epit ied 56 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM ee ette 62 4 Port ISDN BR
312. ositivo da linea ad L e da negativo a negativo da neutro a N Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo WARNING Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord RTN til RTN 48 V til 48 V Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er 48 V til 48 V RTN til RTN jord til jord WARNING Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el extremo del cableado Al conectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado se muele para moler RTN a RTN entonces 48 V a 48 V Al desconectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado es 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN entonces moli para moler Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo WARNING jAtenci n Wire a fonte de alimentac o de DC Usando os tal es apropriados na extremidade da fiac o Ao conectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o mo da para moer RTN a RTN ent o 48 V a 48 V Ao desconectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN moeu ent o para moer Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Varning Korrekt
313. ositivo e stato progettato per l uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN Pb WARNING Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN stremsystemer gt WARNING Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN gt WARNING jAtenci n El equipo esta disenado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentaci n tipo TN gt WARNING Varning Enheten ar konstruerad f r anvandning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN typ Telecommunication Line Cord Warning WARNING To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger UL listed or CSA certified telecommunication line cord WARNING Waarschuwing Om brandgevaar te reduceren dient slechts telecommunicatielijnsnoer nr 26 AWG of groter gebruikt te worden WARNING Varoitus Tulipalovaaran v hent miseksi k yt ainoastaan nro 26 AWG tai paksumpaa tietoliikennejohdinta P gt gt b WARNING Attention Pour r duire les risques d incendie n utiliser que des cordons de lignes de t l communications de type AWG n 26 ou plus larges gt WARNING Warnung Zur Reduzierung der Feuergefahr eine Fernmeldeleitungsschnur der Gr e 26 AWG oder gr er verwenden Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information gt WARNING Avvertenza Per ridurre il rischio di incendio usare solo un cavo per linea di telecomunicazioni di sezione 0 12 mm2 26 AWG o magg
314. other adapter appropriate for your modem Plug the modem adapter into the DB 25 connector on the modem Connect the modem to your telephone network Turn on the power to the modem Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel Verify that the POWER LED on the front panel turns green Connecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Connecting to the CLI at the User End To remotely connect to the CLI through a dial up modem connected to the console port on the router 1 At your remote location connect a modem to a management device such as a PC or laptop computer 2 Onthe PC or laptop computer start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal 5 Select the COM port to which the modem is connected for example COM1 4 Configure the port settings as follows m Bits per second 9600 m Data bits 8 m Parity None m Stop bits 1 m Flow control None 5 Inthe HyperTerminal window enter AT An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the COM port on the PC or laptop 6 To dial the modem that is connected to the console port on the router enter ATDT remote modem number For example if the number of the modem connected to the console port on the router is 0013033033030 enter ATDT 0013033033030 The router login prompt appears 7 Login as the user root No password is required at initial connect
315. ounting bracket Module PIM PIM panel point bracket Power LAN ports Console Auxiliary USB button port port ports Figure 14 Rear of JA350 AC Powered Chassis Protective Power supply AC power AC power earthing terminal fan exhaust appliance inlet switch C NOTE The J4350 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power supply LED unlike the J6350 AC powered chassis Figure 15 Rear of J6350 AC Powered Chassis Protective Power AC power Power Power supply earthing terminal supply appliance supply fan exhaust ejector inlet LED 28 HW J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 16 Rear of JA350 DC Powered Chassis FEE ELLE a Protective DC terminal Power Power supply earthing terminal block supply LED fan exhaust Figure 17 Rear of DC Powered J6350 Chassis AS IN Ahh a 46565656 m m DRA RE M m m A d D d Protective Power DC Power Power supply earthing terminal supply terminal supply fan exhaust ejector block LED J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 29 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 18 J4350 and J6350 Hardware Components Rear Power Crypto Compact Fans 3 DRAM supply Accelerator flash Module
316. ower off the router before removing or installing a PIM might result in damage to the hardware Figure 72 Installing a PIM CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis do not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 110 To install a PIM see Figure 72 on page 176 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the Services Router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Pressandrelease the power button to power off the router Verify that the POWER LED blinks and then turns off 5 Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIM with the notches in the PIM slot in the Services Router and slide the PIM in until it lodges firmly in the router CAUTION Slide the PIM straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components on the PIM Replacing a PIM 4 Tighten the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate 5 Insert the appropria
317. owing features that simplify CLI use m Consistent command names Commands that provide the same type of function have the same name regardless of the portion of the software they are operating on For example all show commands display software information and statistics and all clear commands erase various types of system information m Lists and short descriptions of available commands Information about available commands is provided at each level of the CLI command hierarchy If you type a question mark at any level you see a list of the available commands along with a short description of each command m Command completion Command completion for command names keywords and command options is also available at each level of the hierarchy If you type a partial command name followed immediately by a question mark with no Using the Command Line Interface m 89 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide intervening space you see a list of commands that match the partial name you typed Starting the CLI To start the CLI 1 Establish a connection with the Services Router m To access the router remotely from the network enter the command you typically use to establish a remote connection such as Telnet or ssh using the router hostname m To access the router through a management device attached to the console port start the terminal application m To access the router through the J Web
318. part of each power supply This fan is not regulated by the operating system J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 25 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 11 Airflow Through the J2320 Chassis Front Es Oe Mm ll E Mr y ba 5 Rear Figure 12 Airflow Through the J2350 Chassis Front Ih a MM KITO B li de 004103 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features 26 m This section contains the following topics J4350 and J6350 Chassis on page 27 J4350 and J6550 Midplane on page 31 J4350 and J6550 Routing Engine Hardware on page 51 J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices on page 51 J4350 and J6350 Front Panel on page 32 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview m J4350 Power System on page 56 m J6350 Power System on page 57 m J4350 and J6350 Cooling System on page 38 J4350 and J6350 Chassis The J4350 and J6350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router components see Figure 13 on page 28 through Figure 18 on page 30 The chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets For information about acceptable rack types see Rack Requirements on page 102 In addition to the features described in subsequent sect
319. ply faceplate to the right and hold it in place to unlock the power supply Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to start removing the power supply Slide it halfway out of the chassis see Figure 89 on page 195 Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot install a blank power supply panel over the slot Figure 89 Removing an AC Power Supply Ejector Installing an AC Power Supply in J6350 Routers To install an AC power supply in a 6550 Services Router see Figure 90 on page 196 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 Using both hands slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop Make sure that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source receptacle Replacing Power System Components m 195 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Se
320. poder remover a fonte de alimentac o de energia dever o ser desconectadas todas as conex es existentes WARNING jAtenci n Esta J6550 unidad tiene m s de una conexi n de suministros de alimentaci n para eliminar la alimentaci n por completo deben desconectarse completamente todas las conexiones WARNING Varning Denna J6550 enhet har mer n en str mf rs rjningsanslutning alla anslutningar m ste vara helt avl gsnade innan str mtillf rseln OU enheten ar fullst ndigt bruten Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before working on the router or near power supplies unplug the power cord from an AC router WARNING Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen WARNING Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ennen kuin teet mit n asennuspohjalle tai ty skentelet virtal hteiden l heisyydess WARNING Attention Avant de travailler sur un ch ssis ou proximit d une alimentation lectrique d brancher le cordon d alimentation des unit s en courant alternatif WARNING Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der N he von Netzger ten arbeiten ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Avvertenza Prima di lavorare
321. ported as an FPC number and the PIM number always 0 is reported as a PIC number For more information about network interface naming see J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers 178 m On J2520 and J2350 routers the chassis cover fits tightly on the chassis To remove the cover from the chassis 1 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 2 Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle 5 With a Phillips screwdriver remove the grounding screw 4 Remove the router from the rack Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 5 With a Phillips screwdriver remove the flat head screws from the rear and sides of the chassis 6 Position the router so that you face the front panel 7 Place your hands on the cover and press down while pushing the cover back until the two front tabs disengage from the chassis base see Figure 75 on page 179 Figure 73 Sliding the Chassis Cover 8 Lift the cover upward and pull it away from the tabs on the rear of the chassis see Figure 74 on page 179 Figure 74 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover 9004129 Angle the cover to align e all slots with tabs at both the front and rear of the chassis Cover tab Chassis slot To replace the cover
322. power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 10 To view the DRAM configuration and verify that it was installed correctly issue the show chassis routing engine command described in the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference This command shows the total memory installed Replacing Power System Components The power cords on all Services Routers are replaceable You can add a second power supply to the J6350 Services Router that is of the same type as the first either AC or DC The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis see Figure 15 on page 28 and Figure 17 on page 29 Each J6550 power supply provides power to all components in the router The J6550 power supplies are fully redundant If one power supply fails or is removed the remaining power supply instantly assumes the entire electrical load One power supply can provide full power for as long as the router is operational Each J6350 power supply is hot insertable and hot removable A CAUTION Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time while the Services Router is operational The power supply or a blank power supply panel must remain in the chassis for proper airflow To replace power system components use the following procedures m Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 193 m Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers on page 194 m Installing an AC Power Supply in J6550 Routers on
323. pt contains spaces or special characters enclose string in quotation marks Restart after upgrade prompt set cli restart on upgrade on off CLI prompts you to restart the Services Router after a software upgrade m Setoffto disable the prompt for the session m Set on to reenable the prompt Number of CLI output line displayed at once set cli screen length length Variable depends on terminal type m To change the number of lines displayed on the screen replace length with a value between 1 and 100 000 m To disable the display of a set number of lines replace length with O This feature can be useful when you are issuing CLI commands from scripts 96 m Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Table 46 Configuring the CLI Environment continued Environment CLI Command Default Setting Options Feature Number of CLI set cli screen width Variable depends on terminal type To change the number of characters characters displayed width displayed on a line replace width with on a line a value between 0 and 100 000 Your terminal type set cli terminal unknown or set by console Replace terminal type with one of the terminal type following values ansi vt100 small xterm xterm Using the Command Line Interface m 97 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 98 fm Using the Co
324. r If the partially typed letters uniquely identify a command the complete command name appears Otherwise a message indicates that your entry is ambiguous or invalid Possible command completions are displayed if your entry is ambiguous You can also use command completion on filenames and usernames To display all possible values type one or more characters followed immediately by a question mark To complete these partial entries press Tab only Pressing Spacebar does not work Online Help The CLI provides context sensitive help at every level of the command hierarchy The help information tells you which commands are available at the current level in the hierarchy and provides a brief description of each To get help while in the CLI type a question mark in one of the following ways m Type a question mark at the command line prompt The CLI lists the available commands and options For examples see CLI Operational Mode on page 90 and CLI Configuration Mode on page 91 m Type a question mark after entering the complete name of a command or command option The CLI lists the available commands and options then redisplays the command names and options that you typed user host gt request Possible completions chassis Perform chassis specific operations ipsec Perform IP Security operations message Send text message to other users routing engine Log in to Routing Engine security Perform security level operati
325. r remove the three screws from top of the Crypto Accerator Module as shown in Figure 94 on page 201 Figure 94 Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Module Crypto Accelerator Module Remove screws 3 Gentle lift here to remove the card from the connector 004114 8 Gently lift the Crypto Module to disengage it from the connector on the system board as shown in Figure 94 on page 201 9 Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers m 201 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module To install a Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Take the following steps if you have not already done so a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 b Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off c Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle d Remove the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 2 Locate the Crypto Module connector on the system board see Figure 95 on pa
326. r On and Off on page 127 STATUS LED When the system is powered on the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete If you want to turn the system off and on again we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down and powering it back up Table 8 on page 21 describes the STATUS LED Table 8 J2320 and J2350 STATUS LED Color State Description Green Blinking Router is starting up or performing diagnostics On steadily Router is operating normally Red Blinking Error has been detected ALARM LED The ALARM LED lights amber to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system shutdown When the condition is corrected the light turns off Table 9 on page 22 describes the ALARM LED J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features M 21 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 9 J2320 and J2350 ALARM LED Color State Description Red On steadily Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that has resulted from one of the following conditions A red alarm condition requires immediate action m One or more hardware components have failed m One or more hardware components have exceeded emperature thresholds m An alarm condition configured on an interface has riggered a critical warning Yellow On st
327. r and ground have ready a grounding cable and lug as specified in Chassis Grounding on page 121 and the power cords or cords shipped with the router You must supply your own power cables if you have a DC powered router See DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 108 eo NOTE The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router only and not for any other use To connect network interfaces have ready a length of cable used by the interface as specified in Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 If your router has ISDN ports you might need an NT1 device to connect to the ISDN service For details see ISDN Provisioning on page 112 Unpacking a J series Services Router 116 m The Services Router is shipped in a cardboard carton and secured with foam packing material The carton also contains an accessory box and quick start instructions ec NOTE The router is maximally protected inside the shipping carton Do not unpack it until you are ready to begin installation To unpack the router M Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible but where you have enough room to remove the router Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up Open the top flaps on the shipping carton Remove the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on the label attached to
328. replace the external compact flash 1 Verify the device that the router used to boot by running the show system storage command from the CLI For example user host gt show system storage Filesystem 512 blocks Used Avail Capacity Mounted on dev ad0s1a 218254 175546 40526 81 The boot device is mounted on The internal compact flash is located at adO The external compact flash is located at ad2 The USB storage device is located at daO This example shows that the router booted from the internal compact flash If the show system storage output indicates that the router booted from the external compact flash you need to power off the router before replacing the compact flash 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 4 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash Replacing External Compact Flashes Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Skip this step if the router did not boot from the external compact flash see step 1 5 With a Phillips screwdriver loosen the pan head screws that secure the e
329. ries Services Router Administration Guide Alternatively you can press and release the power button to gracefully shut down the router For more information see Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 127 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 33 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide STATUS LED When the system is powered on the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete If you want to turn the system off and on again we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down and powering it back up Table 13 on page 34 describes the STATUS LED Table 13 STATUS LED Color State Description Green Blinking Router is starting up or performing diagnostics On steadily Router is operating normally Red Blinking Error has been detected ALARM LED The ALARM LED lights yellow to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system shutdown When the condition is corrected the light turns off Table 14 on page 54 describes the ALARM LED Table 14 ALARM LED Color State Description Red On steadily Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that has resulted from one of the following conditions A red alarm condition requires immediate action m One or more hardware components have failed m One or m
330. rotocol over SSL enabling secure access configuration CAM tt op beet De eti 156 enabling secure access Quick Configurator ssec Doa ptr reete er ii peres 155 Quick Configuration eege teen tege ee Deen 155 recommended for secure ACCESS 152 verifying secure access configuration 157 humidity requirement EE 104 Hyperterminal for terminal emulation local CEI connection tene ce et 157 modem connection at router for remote CLI lee 140 modem connection for remote CLI access 141 Hypertext Transfer Protocol See HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL See HTTPS l IBM networking See DLSw idle time setting for a CLI session 96 ifd POCOS cipe e Gr leper anche m Osee ertet 40 1G550 Integrated Gateway See Avaya VoIP modules immunity standards cete eeepc des 280 initial configuration requirements 154 injury steps to take oti eod d od tete 259 installation AC power supplies o nbo eee 195 ait MILER E 208 compact flash sce anh tada 180 185 console port cable chassis 174 Crypto Accelerator Module 202 205 DC power supplies ez 198 DRAM IMOGUIES oi ada olere da 192 iritial c utere idt eet ai t edge 115 licensesxXGE Des eth eat xS 165 licenses GWEDD e ioo tege eene mts 164 PIKES se obese ee ee Erunt dies ees a 177 aC 176 pr parations reset we c en EE 101 Index mM 295 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide requirements stone atus tapete
331. rpen te worden A WARNING Varoitus R j hdyksen vaara jos akku on vaihdettu v r n akkuun K yt vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman tai vastaavantyyppist akkua joka on valmistajan suosittelema H vit k ytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan A WARNING Attention Danger d explosion si la pile n est pas remplac e correctement Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou quivalent recommand e par le fabricant Jeter les piles usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant A WARNING Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 273 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 274 m WARNING Advarsel Det kan vaere fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes p feil m te Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner WARNING Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non installata correttamente Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dal produttore Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore WARNING Aviso Existe perigo de explosao se a bateria for substitu da incorrectament
332. rskrids F rhindra att luftcirkulationen inskr nks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme pa minst 15 2 cm omkring ventilations ppningarna Product Disposal Warning WARNING Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations WARNING Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te worden afgedankt WARNING Varoitus T m n tuotteen lopullisesta h vitt misest tulee huolehtia kaikkia valtakunnallisia lakeja ja s nn ksi noudattaen gt i gt gt WARNING Attention La mise au rebut d finitive de ce produit doit tre effectu e conform ment toutes les lois et r glementations en vigueur Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Warnung Dieses Produkt muf den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend entsorgt werden gt WARNING Avvertenza L eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia WARNING Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet ma skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og forskrifter WARNING Aviso A descartagem final deste produto dever ser efectuada de acordo com os regulamentos e a legislac o nacional WARNING jAtenci n El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse seg n todas las leyes y regulaciones nacionales
333. rvices Router Getting Started Guide CS NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed For information about connecting to AC power sources see Connecting Power on page 122 6 Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on it 7 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Figure 90 Installing an AC Power Supply Replacing DC Power Supply Cables To replace a power cable for a DC power supply 1 Locate a replacement power cable and a lug that meet the specifications defined in Chassis Grounding on page 121 and DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 108 A CAUTION A licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the power cable that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 3 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 4 Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the c
334. s the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 1 6 port m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port El PIM m Dual Port T1 PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m GSHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports a TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J4350 Services Router Overview The 4550 Services Router is designed primarily for regional or branch offices It has a chassis that is 2 U rack units in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power supply and a universal serial bus USB port for external storage J4350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory J4550 routers can contain between 256 MB and 2 GB of memory For instructions on adding memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 190 Each J4350 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface and six slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules Two of the six slots slots 5 and 6 support high speed interfaces ePIMs The J4350 S
335. s to Customer a non exclusive and non transferable license without right to sublicense to use the Software in executable form only subject to the following use restrictions a Customer shall use the Embedded Software solely as embedded in and for execution on Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller b Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees provided however with respect to the Steel Belted Radius or Odyssey Access Client software only Customer shall use such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space and containing any number of processors Use of the Steel Belted Radius software on multiple computers requires multiple licenses regardless of whether such computers are physically contained on a single chassis C Product purchase documents paper or electronic user documentation and or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may specify limits to Customer s use of the Software Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats registered endpoints concurrent users sessions calls connections subscribers clusters nodes realms devices links ports or transactions or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features functionalities services applications
336. sher from the PEM nut at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis d Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding point as shown in Figure 62 on page 126 and Figure 65 on page 127 e Secure the cable lug to the grounding point first with the washer then with the screw On J2320 and J2350 routers use the screw containing a captive washer to secure the cable lug to the grounding point NOTE A DC power supply in a Services Router becomes grounded when you connect a grounding cable between the router and earth ground 5 For each power supply a Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is O V and that the cable leads cannot become active in any way during installation CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply b Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the appropriate power cable lugs to the negative and positive DC source power cables c Usea Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block d Within the terminal block remove the two center screws next to the labels
337. sis to 19 44 in 48 58 cm and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0 5 in 1 27 cm beyond the mounting ears The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack See General Site Guidelines on page 101 A CAUTION If you are mounting the router in a cabinet be sure that ventilation is sufficient to prevent overheating If a front mount rack is used we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure The J4350 and J6550 chassis height of 5 44 in 8 74 cm equals 2 U Each U isa standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association Connection to Building Structure Always secure the rack to the structure of the building If your geographical area is subject to earthquakes bolt the rack to the floor For maximum stability also secure the rack to ceiling brackets For more information see Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 264 Rack Requirements m 103 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Router Environmental Tolerances Table 47 on page 104 specifies the environmental conditions required for normal Services Router operation In addition the site must be as dust free as possible Dust can clog air intake vents reducing cooling system efficiency Check vents frequently cleaning th
338. snug Do not overtighten Slide the cover onto the router and replace and tighten the cover screws Replace the power cord or cable Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis hardware command as shown in the following example user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis JN1086A34ADA J4350 Midplane REV 00 710 014594 System IO REV 00 710 012315 JX350 System IO Routing Engine REV 00 710 012149 RE J4350 2540 Crypto Module Crypto acceleration FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC If Crypto Module appears in the output the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed correctly 206 1H Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers The cooling fans on 2550 routers draw air through vents along the left side of the chassis and exhaust it through vents on the right side of the chassis For more information see J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria the air intake grid contains a filter To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output
339. sover Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 9 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 1 RX Tip TX Tip 4 11 TX Ring gt RX Ring 5 5 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip 5 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground E1 and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts m 239 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 84 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinout continued DB 15 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 7 o connect o connect 8 o connect o connect 9 o connect o connect 10 o connect o connect 11 o connect o connect 12 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect 14 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout The E5 and T5 PIMs each use two BNC connectors one for transmitting data TX and one for receiving data RX ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout The 1 port ADSL 2 2 Annex A and Annex B PIMs use an RJ 11 cable which is not supplied with the PIMs The 2 port G SHDSL Annex A and Annex B PIM also uses an RJ 11 cable which is not supplied with the PIM Table 85 on page 240 describes the RJ 11 connector pinout Table 85 ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 o connect 2 o connect 5 RJ P Tip 4 RJ N Ring 5 o connect
340. specifying the license ID You can delete only one license at a time request system license delete icense id 3 Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 Saving License Keys with the CLI To save the licenses installed on the Services Router to a file with the CLI 1 Enter operational mode in the CLI 2 To save the installed license keys to a file or URL enter the following command request system license save filename url For example the following command saves the installed license keys to a file named license config request system license save ftp user host license conf 5 Goon to Verifying J series License Management on page 167 166 Hm Managing J series Licenses with the CLI Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Verifying J series License Management To verify J series license management perform these tasks m Displaying Installed Licenses on page 168 m Displaying License Usage on page 169 m Displaying Installed License Keys on page 169 Verifying J series License Management M 167 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Displaying Installed Licenses 168 m Purpose Verify that the expected licenses are installed and active on the Services Router Action From the CLI enter the show system license command user router gt show system license License usage Licenses Licenses Licenses Feature name used installed needed j flow 0
341. splays an SSL certificate generated with instructions in Generating SSL Certificates on page 153 edit user RO show security certificates local new BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY nMIICXQIBAAKBgQC C5UI4frNqbi qPwbTiOkJvqoDw2YgYse0Z5zzVJyErgSg954T nEUHM67Ck8hAOrCnbOYO SY Y5rCXLf4 2s8k9EypLtYRw TS66DZoxl4viqE7 HSsk n5sQw UDBIw7 MJ OpA KYiFf4CbBBbjIMQJOHFudW6ISVBsIONkzX FT ni95ddka6ilRnArEb4VFCRh e1QBdp1UjziYf7 NuzDx4Z n END RSA PRIVATE KEY n BEGIN CERTIFICATE NnMIIDjDCCAvWgAwIBAgIBADANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQ FADCBkTELMAkKGALUEBhMCdXMx nCZAJBgNVBAgTAMNhMRIWEAYDVQQHEwizdW5ue HB1YnMxDTALBgNVBAMTBGpucHbODAiBgkghkiGNn9wOBCQEWFWB5iaGFyZ2F2YUB fLUYAnBYmsYWOH n END CERTIFICATE n SECRET DATA What It Means The output shows the intended secure access configuration See Also For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide 158 1H Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access Displaying a Secure Access Configuration Purpose Verify the secure access configuration Action From the J Web interface select Configuration View and Edit View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show system services command The following sample output displays the sample values for secure Web access as configured in Table 60 on page 156 edit user RO
342. sta kaltevaa pintaa jonka kaltevuus ylitt 10 astetta Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l inclinaison est sup rieure 10 degr s Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden WARNING Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader Aviso N o utilize uma rampa com uma inclina o superior a 10 graus jAtenci n No usar una rampa inclinada m s de 10 grados Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Varning Anvand inte ramp med en lutning pa mer an 10 grader Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings Single mode Physical Interface Modules PIMs are equipped with laser transmitters which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U S Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825 1 requirements Observe the following guidelines and warnings m General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 269 m Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 269 m Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 270 m Laser Beam Warning on page 270 m Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning on page 271 General Laser Safety Guidelines When working around PIMs observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye injury m Donot look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources m Donot examine unterminated optical ports with op
343. stall a DRAM module 1 Take the following steps if you have not already done so a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see the Getting Started Guide for your router Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis For J2320 and J2350 routers see Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 2 Remove the DRAM module from its electrostatic bag 5 Press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the DRAM slot to open it see Figure 88 on page 192 4 Grasp the DRAM module by the edges being careful not to touch any electrical components Replacing DRAM Modules Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 5 Pressing firmly on both ends push the module into the slot until the ejectors click into the closed position see Figure 88 on page 192 6 Slide the cover onto the chassis 7 Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis 8 Replace the power cord or cable 9 Pressandrelease the
344. sterne rei 62 Copper Gigabit Ethernet 52 SEP Gigabit Ethernet vss ees eb ates 52 leet LEE 55 EPROM Ni gees 18 51 ESD electrostatic discharge preventing 249 ESD wrist strap verifying resistance for aalen 249 wearing during installation cee 27 Ethernet cable chassis console DB 9 connector pinouts 257 chassis console RJ 45 connector pinouts 256 connecting the Services Router to a management DEVICE cies e tet edid e 155 157 connecting the Services Router to a modem 140 replacing stes ione ds 174 TGM550 console DB 9 connector pinouts 241 TGM550 console RJ 45 connector pinouts 241 Ethernet ports See Fast Ethernet ports See Gigabit Ethernet ports ETR LED US Acte eee tr ee ir E PAPIAS 72 European Union compliance statement 282 external compact flash See compact flash F factory configuration resetting with RESCUE CONFIG DUO EU DI EE 22 55 failures compact flash USB for 24 56 PIM tro bleshooting uec ett e dees 212 Routing Engine fan troubleshooting 212 fans CESETIPUOU as 25 58 See also air filter See also cooling system failure troubleshooting 212 Fast Ethernet ports 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM sssssssss 62 ACTIVITY status dual port PM 61 Dual Port Fast Ethernet DIN 61 LED states 4 port ePIM toot eet ert t 65 LED states dual port PIM ssssse 61 294 m Inde
345. su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle unit CA WARNING Advarsel Fer det utfores arbeid pa kabinettet eller det arbeides i naerheten av stromforsyningsenheter skal str mledningen trekkes ut p vekselstromsenheter WARNING Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de energia desligue o cabo de alimenta o nas unidades de corrente alternada WARNING Atenci n Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentaci n desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n en los equipos de corriente alterna CA WARNING Varning Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nara str mf rs rjningsenheter skall du for v xelstr msenheter dra ur n tsladden TN Power Warning WARNING The router is designed to work with a TN power system WARNING Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN energiesystemen WARNING Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN s hk voimaj rjestelmien yhteydess WARNING Attention Ce dispositif a t concu pour fonctionner avec des syst mes d alimentation TN P bb gt gt WARNING Warnung Das Ger t ist f r die Verwendung mit TN Stromsystemen ausgelegt Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 261 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 262 m WARNING Avvertenza Il disp
346. t Panel sist ca 32 Physical Interface Modules PIMS nre tenrec 32 Power Button and POWER LED eee 33 STATUS LED a edo eee lis e ep ata Men eis 34 NONE RN 54 Ip PUDE 55 RESET COBNEIG Button oniani nen t e e e or media 35 Built In Gigabit Ethernet Porte 35 CONSOLE ROLE der teat etes e tte ettet tabs st 36 AUX POFLU ose ii pa Riese Rar tee ee 56 USB POPE dein oti e eee e erp tet Pase te us 56 4550 BOESEN pe ae 56 6550 PoOWeE SySIeTITo s ut dee societe even dea tbe i aee Aot des R oet etes 37 4350 and J6350 Cooling System i aree eer ne nene ns 38 Software OVSEVIeW ipee cento eee did o Sege 39 Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine eccerre 40 Leet ae Microkernel srt ea da detesta ot lor De olas Ep 40 JUNOS Software Processes sis cett ri terei tor o atte a e edu t 40 USer Iritetfaees cao moo n EH E e ECHO e ERR ER ttr acted 41 Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview 43 PIM and VoIP Module Terms ger cemere eo rte oe eerte ee ege dede 44 Field Beplaceable PIMSs cnin ttp e e b ee ER 46 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary ieren 46 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary sss 47 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet UPIMS inn 49 I Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMS on resin RR E RR 52 Dual Port Serial PIM agudo ite te e ete eee dee e dg p 55 ualzPort T1 or EPI ui ettet her tete ele eti a a 56 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM recreos 57 O 59 Dual Port Fast Etliernet PIM ENNEN t
347. t be connected to a dedicated AC power feed For information about connecting to AC power sources see Connecting Power on page 122 8 Verify that the power cord does not block access to Services Router components or drape where people might trip on it 9 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers 194 m The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis A power supply weighs 2 4 lb 1 1 kg To remove an AC power supply from a J6550 Services Router see Figure 89 on page 195 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 2 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Replacing Power System Components Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components NOTE If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Service Router p Pply p DIN you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate Slide the ejector tab on the power sup
348. t install a combination of PIMs that exceeds the power or heat capacity of your router when J series power management is disabled The set chassis disable power management command brings the offline PIMs online automatically To reenable J series power management remove the configuration statement For detailed information about the set chassis fpc offline and set chassis disable power management configuration statements see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center 214 m If you need assistance while troubleshooting a Services Router open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 from outside the United States For more information see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 215 Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware This chapter describes how to return the Services Router or individual components to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement It contains the following topics m Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 215 m Contacting Customer Support on page 218 m Return Procedure on page 219 m Packing a Router or Component for Shipment on page 220 Locating Component Serial Numbers Before contacting Juniper Networks to request a Return Mater
349. t is rated for the power requirements of a maximally configured router To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 8 A 48 VDC Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud m Inthe United States a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 NOTE Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker This breaker should protect against excess currents short circuits and earth faults in accordance with NEC ANSI NFPA70 m Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct Under certain conditions connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment m For personal safety connect the green and yellow wire to safety earth ground at both the router and the supply side of the DC wiring m The marked input voltage of 48 VDC for a DC powered router is the nominal voltage associated with the battery circuit and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the charging function m Because the router is a positive ground system you must connect the positive lead to the terminal labeled
350. t of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes On 2520 and J2350 routers an external compact flash also known as removable compact flash accepts a type I or II compact flash as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association The J2320 and J2350 chassis has a slot on the rear for external compact flashes see Figure 5 on page 15 When the external compact flash is installed and configured it automatically acts as the secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending on the capacity of the external compact flash you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring an external compact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide J2320 Power System The J2520 Services Router uses AC power see Figure 5 on page 15 The autosensing power supply distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The J2320 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specificat
351. t you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers m 121 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Connecting Power m For J2320 and J2550 Services Routers The grounding cables must be at minimum 14 AWG single strand wire cable The grounding lug must be a ring type vinyl insulated TV14 8R lug as shown in Figure 59 on page 125 and Figure 60 on page 124 m For J4350 and J6550 Services Routers The grounding cables must be at minimum 12 AWG single strand wire cable The grounding lug must be a two hole lug as shown in Figure 61 on page 124 To ground the router before connecting power you connect the grounding cable to earth ground and then attach the lug on the cable to the chassis grounding point with the screw See Connecting Power on page 122 J2320 J2350 and J4350 Services Routers have a single fixed power supply J6350 Services Routers have one or two field replaceable power supplies For more information about the J series power specifications see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location Connecting AC Power 122 m The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on t
352. tack To enable secure Web access a router supports Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer HTTPS You can enable HTTP or HTTPS access on specific interfaces and ports as needed You can use J Web Quick Configuration the J Web configuration editor or the CLI configuration editor to configure secure Web access This chapter contains the following topics For more information about the J Web interface see the J Web Interface User Guide m Secure Web Access Terms on page 151 m Secure Web Access Overview on page 152 m Before You Begin on page 152 m Configuring Secure Web Access on page 155 m Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor on page 156 m Verifying Secure Web Access on page 157 Secure Web Access Terms Before configuring secure Web access become familiar with the terms defined in Table 58 on page 151 Table 58 Secure Web Access Terms Term Definition certificate authority CA Third party organization or company that issues digital certificates used to create digital signatures and public private key pairs The CA guarantees the identity of the individual or device that presents the digital certificate Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP Protocol used to publish and receive information on the Web such as text and graphics files Secure Web Access Terms WM 151 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 58 Secure Web Access Terms
353. tart shell telnet Telnet to another host test Perform diagnostic debugging traceroute Trace route to remote host At the top level of operational mode are a number of broad groups of CLI commands that are used to perform the following functions m Control the CLI environment m Monitor and troubleshoot the router m Connect to other systems m Manage files and software images Control software processes m Stop and reboot the router m Enter configuration mode To control the CLI environment see Configuring the CLI Environment on page 95 To enter configuration mode see CLI Configuration Mode on page 91 For information about the other CLI operational mode functions see the J series Services Router Administration Guide CLI Configuration Mode To configure the Services Router including system parameters routing protocols interfaces network management and user access you must enter configuration mode In configuration mode the CLI provides commands to configure the router load a text ASCII file that contains the router configuration activate a configuration and save the configuration to a text file You enter configuration mode by entering the configure operational mode command The CLI prompt changes from user host gt to user host To view a list of configuration mode commands type a question mark at the command line prompt You do not need to press Enter after typing the question mark user
354. te cables into the cable connectors on the PIM Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 6 If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops 7 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing PIM Cables Removing and installing PIM cables does not affect Services Router function except that a PIM does not receive or transmit data while its cable is disconnected To replace a PIM cable perform the following procedures m Removing PIM Cables on page 177 m Installing PIM Cables on page 177 Removing PIM Cables To remove a PIM cable 1 Ifyou are removing all cables connected to the PIM issue the following CLI command to take the PIM offline userQ host request chassis fpc slot pim slot offline For example to take the PIM in slot 4 offline enter the following command userQ host request chassis fpc slot 4 offline For more information about the command see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference 2 Unplug the cable from the cable connector port 5 Detach the cable from the destination port Installing PIM Cables To install a PIM cable 1 Have ready a length of the type of cabl
355. ter Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis For J2320 and J2350 routers see Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 To release the DRAM module press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the module see Figure 88 on page 192 Grasp the DRAM module being careful not to touch any electrical components on the module and firmly pull it out of the slot on the system board Place the DRAM module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Replacing DRAM Modules m 191 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 88 Installing or Replacing DRAM Modules Remove Chassis rear Installing a DRAM Module 192 m Install Chassis rear 004112 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers support 256 MB and 512 MB DRAM modules Use only DRAM modules purchased from Juniper Networks specifically for your model CS NOTE If you are installing a second DRAM module do not install it in a slot adjacent to the first module For example if the first DRAM module is installed in slot 1 install the second module in slot 3 see Figure 86 on page 190 and Figure 87 on page 191 To in
356. ter attempts to boot from the external compact flash if it is installed If the external compact flash is not present or fails the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device J2320 and J2350 Front Panel The front panel of a J2320 or J2350 Services Router see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 allows you to install or remove PIMs view router status LEDs access the console port and perform simple control functions Figure 8 Front of J2320 Chassis POWER CONFIG Console Physical Interface PIM blanks LED LED port Module PIM Juniper J2320 2 Ji vo E deis X o pud Wf 3i aS l LED g sm cone rZ SUIT NUMBER ls e 3 BARS CONDE E qz m E 1 Q 3 ALARM LED ESD HA LED Power RESET Auxiliary LAN USB point button CONFIG port ports ports button Figure 9 Front of J2350 Chassis POWER CONFIG Auxiliary Physical Interface PIM blanks LED LED port Module PIM J Qu Juniper J235 0 des e 1 D n e as E STATUS PX Ae gi l 7 a LED S ed CONFIG DO a e a ES nm SB Td Como Ak a O e LED N HA
357. terminal Power AC power Power supply cable tie appliance inlet fan exhaust 9004101 Figure 4 Rear of J2350 AC Powered Chassis External compact Protective Air filter flash cover earthing terminal Screw Power AC power Power supply cable tie appliance inlet fan exhaust 9004123 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 15 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 5 Rear of J2350 DC Powered Chassis External compact Protective Air filter flash cover earthing terminal Screw Ke Power DC terminal Power supply y cable tie block fan exhaust Figure 6 J2320 Hardware Components front Physical Interface Internal compact Midplane Module PIM flash cover EA f A E p 3 5 Fans 5 3 E 3 jms i T mmi DRAM 2 pairs Crypto External Power Accelerator compact supply Module flash Rear 16 Mm J2320and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 7 J2350 Hardware Components Front Physical Interface Internal compact Midplane Module PIM flash cover yo I Fans 4 C JC
358. ternal management device you need an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter which is also supplied with the TGM550 Table 87 TGM550 RJ 45 Console Connector Pinouts TGM550 RJ 45 Pin Signal Terminal DB 9 Pins 1 For future use NC 2 TXD TGM550 input 5 3 RXD TGM550 output 2 4 CD 4 5 GND 5 6 DTR 1 7 RTS 8 8 CTS 7 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports The two analog telephone ports and two analog trunk ports on the TGM550 use an RJ 11 cable Table 88 on page 242 describes the TGM550 RJ 11 connector pinout Table 88 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 5 Ring 4 Tip 5 No connection 6 No connection 242 1H Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout The TIM510 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 45 cable Table 89 on page 243 describes the TIM510 RJ 45 connector pinout Table 89 TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 R Receive 2 T Receive 5 No connection 4 RI Receive 5 T1 Receive 6 No connection 7 No connection 8 No connection TIM514 Connector Pinout The TIM514 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 11 cable Table 90 on page 245 describes the TIM514 RJ 11 connector pinout information Table 90 TIM514 RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection
359. tical instruments m Avoid direct exposure to the beam A WARNING Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina so focusing the eye directly on a laser source even a low power laser could permanently damage the eye Class 1 Laser Product Warning A WARNING Class 1 laser product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 laser produkt Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote Attention Produit laser de classe I Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 269 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 270 nm Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1 WARNING Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1 Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1 Aviso Produto laser de classe 1 jAtenci n Producto l ser Clase I Varning Laserprodukt av klass 1 Class 1 LED Product Warning WARNING Class 1 LED product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED product Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I Warnung Class 1 LED Produktwarnung WARNING Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1 Advarsel LED produkt i klasse 1 Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED jAtenci n Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1 Varning Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1 Laser Beam Warning WARNING Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and R
360. ting Engine During this process the PIM performs framing and line speed signaling for its medium type For a complete list of supported PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 Avaya VoIP modules are installed in the router chassis like PIMs but are controlled by the Avaya Communication Manager CM software rather than the JUNOS Internet software For a complete list of supported modules see Avaya VoIP Modules on page 67 For J series Services Router PIM compatibility matrix and datasheets go to http www juniper net products jseries For information about network interfaces and for configuration instructions see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide This chapter contains the following topics m PIM and VoIP Module Terms on page 44 m Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 m Avaya VoIP Modules on page 67 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide PIM and VoIP Module Terms To understand PIMs and VoIP modules become familiar with the terms defined in Table 18 on page 44 Table 18 PIM and VoIP Module Terms Term Definition ADSL 2 2 Annex A ITU T Standard G 992 1 that defines how ADSL works over plain old telephone service POTS lines ADSL 2 2 Annex B ITU T Standard G 992 1 that defines how ADSL works over Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN lines bandwidth on demand ISDN cost control feature defining t
361. ting brackets installing on J4550 and enn 121 on T2320 aNd EE 2 code endete 117 multiple routers sale tack Bref o o ete item md 117 119 N NEBS Network Equipment Building System identifying NEBS compliant routers 38 shutdown temperature for NEBS compliant IOULGES acercan ed eese E p deti network cable pinouts Network Equipment Building System See NEBS Network Time Protocol NTP server See NTP server NOUCE ICONS ita yin ees when eaten xvii NT1 device provisioning Information 112 NTP server defining configuration editor 147 defining Quick Configuratont 145 EE 131 requirement for Common Criteria environments escaso ee ne 131 o OK button J Web configuration editor 87 Quick Configurations n teei i a 86 ONLINE LEDs ADSL PIM Status iee end ter tet teta 65 channelized EI porte iere ere 59 channelized T1 ports G SHDSL PIM stage ISDN BRI PIM sans openssl commande operating system See JUNOS Internet software operational mode commands attt ped oet vt tbe 90 Pro Mp 5 ettet e eas 90 overview E e TE 4 E LEE 4 P Packet Forwarding Engine 40 THICEOKGETUela aoi batte eb e ettet lt 40 packing materials packing a Services Router for shipment 220 packing components for shipment 221 GE 116 pagesylaygut mJ Webin ed te ee pte ende 82 parentheses in syntax descriptions xviii password See root password
362. tive washer 9004127 Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Figure 63 Connecting DC Power to the J4350 or J6350 Services Router Screw with captive washer _ Washer Grounding lug Powering a Services Router On and Off TO power on a Services Router press the power button The Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED lights during startup and remains on steadily when the router is operating normally To power off a Services Router you can shut it down in one of the following ways m Graceful shutdown Press and release the power button The router begins gracefully shutting down the operating system and then powers itself off m Immediate shutdown Press the power button and hold it for more than 5 seconds The router immediately powers itself off without shutting down the operating system To remove power completely from the router unplug the AC power cord or switch off the DC power source The power button on the Services Router is a standby power switch If the router is connected to a power source when you press the power button to power the router off the router remains in standby mode and a small amount 5 V and 3 3 V of standby voltage is still available in the chassis Powering a Services Router On and Off M 127 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 128 1H Powering a Services Router On and Off Chapter 7
363. transmission service level for each queue and manage congestion using a random early detection RED algorithm After defining the CoS components you must assign classifiers to the required physical and logical interfaces This section contains the following topics a Defining CoS Components a Defining CoS Value Aliases a Defining Forwarding Classes a Defining Classifiers a Defining Rewrite Rules a Defining Schedulers a Defining Virtual Channel Groups a Assigning CoS Components to Interfaces Next Report an Error You establish a J Web session with the Services Router through an HTTP enabled or HTTPS enabled Web browser The HTTPS protocol which uses 128 bit encryption is available only in domestic versions of the JUNOS software To use HTTPS you must have installed a certificate on the Services Router and enabled HTTPS When you attempt to log in through the J Web interface the Services Router authenticates your username with the same methods used for Telnet and SSH The Services Router can support multiple J Web sessions for a single user who logs in to each session However if a single user attempts to launch multiple J Web windows for example by right clicking a link to launch another instance of a Web browser the session can have unpredictable results If the Services Router does not detect any activity through the J Web interface for 15 minutes the session times out and is terminated You must log in aga
364. troriagnetic Cormpatibility i eet hee t Ph ed ette 106 Router Power Requirements ano oeri i or e REAN eme ener 106 AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications sssss 107 DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications sse 108 Planning for Power Management 110 Network Cable Specifications ssssssssssssssss ee 112 ISDN tomeist ee Ee e E ERE t eee tea tae ef iude 112 Site Pr paration Checklist occ ec en te e t pede etie e tae duda 112 Installing and Connecting a Services Router 115 Before de E testet m edat ent o e UE TP ERE Mere Eo 115 Unpacking a J series Services Router sssssssssssss nn nan nnnnnnnns 116 Installing 2320 arid 2350 RoUtets rte tt t t ae dte ree 117 Installing J4350 and J6550 Routers c 0ooocccccccccccccocannnnnnnnnnnccnonononnnan nana cnn nnnnnnns 118 Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers ccecce 121 Chassis Groundlng i eter Du eret et be rer eese E eR Ue ede e ea 121 Connecting POWEL gesteet et e a et ede te hub eei bu batte bouts 122 Corinecting AC POWOTI rende vcr ane Pe ree vue Seu uA Siete 122 Connecting e WEE 124 Powering a Services Router On and Off ssssssssssss es 127 Establishing Basic Connectivity 129 Basic Connectivity T EITIS iud hit eG e D tees 129 Basic Connectivity OVERVIEW te ete ise lolitas ea 150 Router TderitificatiOn a ee e eM exe b etr DR tate sas POLARS 150 Root PAsSWOF metia stet phun etel ec last
365. ts orosei na a a 102 lifting guidelines 263 MOUNTING Brackets ia npt e ii 121 order of multiple routerg 117 119 PIOCE UTE ola 117 118 safety guidelines and wamings 264 securing rack to butldimg ees 105 Size requirements veo ae err es 102 105 support for front mount rack 102 105 ventilation requirement sssssssss 102 105 radio frequency interference RFI reducing 106 ramp angle requirement read or write error Routing Engine red alarms See major alarms red astessk i d eto d e M ed 84 redundant J6550 power supplies description s oue decet EE 37 safety guidelines for power sources 252 regulatory Compllamce errereen 245 releaseznotes URL ut n pest ems xv 302 m Index remote connection to router console port configuring modem at router end 159 configuring modem at user end 141 connecting modem to routier 140 OVeLVIeW se ees da in 139 replacement AC DOWeF COPE iuit Nette dtes 195 O a a aae ia 208 console port cable Chassis 174 Crypto Accelerator Module 200 203 DO power Cable dotis pb E 196 DRAM Modules tai bre 190 external compact flash 186 internal compact flash 180 185 gcc pec iaa a TiS 177 Ms tre ht obtestor 174 power system enn 195 ools and parts required 175 USB Storage devices sept be ne 188 request chassis pic fpc slot commande 177 request system license add command
366. tware packages and licenses and copy a snapshot of the system software to a backup device a Configuring and monitoring events Filter and view system log messages that record events occurring on the router You can configure files to log system log messages and also assign attributes such as severity levels to messages Configuring and monitoring alarms On J series routers only monitor and diagnose the router by monitoring active alarms that alert you to the conditions on a network interface You can also set the conditions that trigger alarms on an interface For more information about the J Web interface see Using the J Web Interface on page 81 The CLI is a straightforward command interface in which you type commands on a line and press Enter to execute them The CLI provides command help command completion and Emacs style keyboard sequences for moving around on the command line and scrolling through a buffer of recently executed commands The CLI has two modes m Operational mode Complete set of commands to control the CLI environment monitor and troubleshoot network connectivity manage the Services Router and enter configuration mode m Configuration mode Complete set of commands to configure the Services Router This guide refers to configuration mode as the CLI configuration editor For more information about the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 89 Before you start the user interface you
367. twork Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts 225 Serial PIM Cable Specifications sssssssssssssss e 225 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinta Ct sere faa 226 RS 232 DGE Cable PInQUE atre co te ge e eo e epe oen dudes 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout sss 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinout eR 229 EIA 530A DTE Cable PINOUT i rote WR res Ehe tette 250 EIA 530A DCE Cabl PinQut oc i eret ee CI ee S eet ete 251 MOSS BREET 252 V35 DCE Cable PIU tii npe dere ee eere PAR GER 255 X21 DTE Cable Pim Outi Aender e DR ete e 255 Xel DCE Cable Pinout i npe AA e d 254 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector BINOUE 5 tet tegit oerte 255 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinot 255 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinot 256 Chassis Console Port PINOUIS dc eee reser de m dp Edel EEN eier 256 Ed and 1 1R 48 Cable PIDOUIS eit ee e tU teo ud fete eas 257 E3 and T5 BNC Connector Pinout sssssssss ee eee 240 ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout sssssssss 240 ISDN R 45 Connector Pinout merir tate te tH e denen eA 241 Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP MOQU ES arrien eerisraei a a 241 TGM550 Console Port PINOUtS ee en nter ote eet 241 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Porte 242 TIM510 BJ 45 Connector Pin Out aie oe enter er tH E aret qd 245 TIMS 14 CONNECtOP PINOUT oce tee oo Coe vett eo P rete teme itas 245 TIM521 Connector PIQUE cp pec e A oe o de Vo ER 245 Safety and Regu
368. u can also install SSL certificates and enable JUNOScript over SSL with the Secure Access page Figure 69 on page 154 shows the Secure Access Quick Configuration page Configuring Secure Web Access M 153 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 69 Quick Configuration Secure Access Page Diagnose Manage Events ogged in as res Help About Logout Quick Configuration Secure Access Certificates Local certificates are used in providing SSL server access No certificates are defined HTTP Web Access HTTP access allows management of the router via the web interface Communication between the router web server and your browser is sent in the clear including passwords so it is recommended that you do disallow HTTP access from your WAN interfaces Enable HTTP access v gt Enable HTTP on All Interfaces Y HTTP Interfaces Logical Interfaces HTTP Enabled Interfaces HTTPS Web Access HTTPS access allows secure management of the router via the web interface Communication between the router web server and your browser is encrypted using a session key negotiated using the SSL server certificate Enable HTTPS access HTTPS Certificate Enable HTTPS on All Interfaces HTTPS Interfaces Logical Interfaces HTTPS Enabled Interfaces UNOScript over SSL Configuring SSL access for the JUNOScript XML scripting API access allows securely management of the router Enable SSL JU
369. udes processes for Internet Protocol IP routing and for managing interfaces networks and the router chassis The JUNOS Internet software runs on the Routing Engine The Routing Engine kernel coordinates communication among the JUNOS software processes and provides a link to the Packet Forwarding Engine With the J Web interface and the command line interface CLI you configure the routing protocols that run on the Services Router and set the properties of its network interfaces After activating a software configuration use either user interface to monitor the protocol traffic passing through the router manage operations and diagnose protocol and network connectivity problems This section contains the following topics m Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine on page 40 m Kernel and Microkernel on page 40 m JUNOS Software Processes on page 40 m User Interfaces on page 41 Software Overview M 39 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine A Services Router has two primary software processing components m Routing Engine The Routing Engine provides three main functions m Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the Services Router providing route lookup filtering and switching on incoming data packets then directing outbound packets to the appropriate interface for transmission to the network a Maintains the routing tables used by the ro
370. uide 140 m From the PC or laptop computer start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal and select the COM port to which the modem is connected for example COM1 Configure the port settings as follows m Bits per second 9600 m Data bits 8 m Parity None m Stop bits 1 m Flow control None In the HyperTerminal window enter AT An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the COM port on the PC or laptop To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring enter ATSO 1 To configure the modem to accept modem control Data Terminal Ready DTR signals enter AT amp D1 To disable flow control enter AT amp KO To save modem settings enter AT amp W Connecting the Modem to the Console Port er NOTE Most modems have an RS 232 DB 25 connector You must separately purchase an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter and Ethernet cable supplied with the router To connect the dial up modem to the console port on the router 1 2 3 fer E Turn off power to the router Turn off the power to the modem Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with your router into the console port on the router Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter supplied with your router Connect the serial port adapter to a separately purchased DB 9 female to DB 25 male adapter or
371. ule continued Label Color State Description ACT Yellow On steadily Active The TGM550 is online with network traffic ASB Green On steadily Alternate software bank The software is not running from the selected boot bank ETR Green On steadily Emergency transfer relay ETR feature is active For more information about the TGM550 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module The TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module Figure 42 on page 73 also known as the TIM510 E1 T1 media module terminates an El or T1 trunk The TIM510 T1 E1 media module has a built in channel service unit CSU so an external CSU is not necessary The CSU is used for a T1 circuit only Up to two TIM510s can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router Figure 42 TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module 9003856 The TIM510 provides the following key features m El orT1 trunk port with up to 50 channels on an El port and 24 channels on a T1 port m DSi evel support for a variety of El and T1 trunk types m Trunk signaling to support U S and international central office CO or tie trunks m Echo cancellation in either direction incoming or outgoing For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM510 see TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 245 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 174 Avaya VoIP
372. um power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on Before You Begin This chapter contains the following topics Before You Begin on page 115 Unpacking a J series Services Router on page 116 Installing 2520 and J2350 Routers on page 117 Installing 4550 and J6550 Routers on page 118 Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers on page 121 Chassis Grounding on page 121 Connecting Power on page 122 Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 127 Before you begin installation complete the following tasks Read the information in Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 275 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 265 Determine where to install the Services Router and verify that the rack or installation site meets the requirements described in Preparing for Router Installation on page 101 For installation gather the following equipment and tools Before You Begin M 115 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m ForJ2520 and J2350 Routers Number 2 Phillips screwdriver and mounting screws appropriate for your rack For J4350 and J6550 Routers Mounting brackets and screws provided number 2 Phillips screwdriver and mounting screws appropriate for your rack To connect the router to powe
373. unding type power outlet Do not circumvent this safety feature Equipment grounding should comply with local and national electrical codes You must provide an external Listed circuit breaker rated minimum 15 A in the building installation The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device The socket outlet must be near the router and be easily accessible The cores in the mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code within the United States m Green and yellow Earth m Blue Neutral Brown Live When a router is equipped with two AC power supplies both power cords one for each power supply must be unplugged to completely disconnect power to the router Note the following warnings printed on the AC power supply faceplate m To completely de energize the system disconnect maximum of 2 power cordsets m Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag nar den ansluts till ett n tverk Swedish Power Cable Warning Japanese WARNING The attached power cable is only for this product Do not use the cable for another product X P SO SR I Fev Hk COS m RI CS HOE Soa cH FH UU CEU 9017253 Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 251 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 252 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC powered router m ADC powered router is equipped with a DC terminal block tha
374. upplied to Customer may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting Customer s ability to export the Software without an export license 12 Commercial Computer Software The Software is commercial computer software and is provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227 7201 through 227 7202 4 FAR 12 212 FAR 27 405 b 2 FAR 52 227 19 or FAR 52 227 14 ALT III as applicable 15 Interface Information To the extent required by applicable law and at Customer s written request Juniper shall provide Customer with the interface information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program on payment of applicable fee if any Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use such information in compliance with any applicable terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available 14 Third Party Software Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products or technology are embedded in or services are accessed by the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement and such licensor or vendor shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper In addition certain third
375. uration on the Services Router From the CLI enter the show system license usage command user router gt show system license usage Licenses Licenses Licenses Feature name used installed needed j flow 0 0 1 bgp reflection 1 1 0 disw EE 1 0 The output shows a list of the licenses installed on the Services Router and how they are used Verify the following information m Each licensed feature is present Features are listed in ascending alphabetical order by license name The number of licenses is shown in the third column Verify that the appropriate number of licenses are installed m The number of used licenses matches the number of configured features If a licensed feature is configured the feature is considered used The sample output shows that the DLSw and BGP route reflection features are configured m A license is installed on the Services Router for each configured feature For every feature configured that does not have a license one license is needed For example the sample output shows that the user has configured the J Flow traffic analysis feature but has not purchased the license for it An additional license is required to be in compliance with license agreements Displaying Installed License Keys Purpose Action What It Means Verify the license keys installed on the Services Router From the CLI enter the show system license keys command user router gt show system license keys G03000002223 aeaq
376. ure Licenses on page 161 License Key Components on page 162 Software Feature Licenses Each feature license is tied to exactly one software feature and that license is valid for exactly one Services Router Table 61 on page 161 lists the Services Router software features that require licenses Table 61 J series Services Router Software Feature Licenses Licensed Software Feature License Name IBM Networking J series License Overview m 161 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 61 J series Services Router Software Feature Licenses continued Licensed Software Feature License Name Data link switching DLSw on all J series Services Routers J series Services Router Software License for Data Link Switching DLSw Support Traffic Analysis J Flow traffic analysis all configuration statements within the edit forwarding options sampling and edit forwarding options accounting hierarchies J series Services Router Software License for J Flow Traffic Analysis BGP Route Reflectors Advanced Border Gateway Protocol BGP features that enable route reflectors all configuration statements within the edit protocols bgp cluster hierarchy BGP clusters allow routers to act as route reflectors by enabling the readvertising of BGP routes to internal peers J series Services Router Software License for Advanced Border Router Protocol Support License
377. urity IPSec services The cryptographic algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard AES Data Encryption Standard DES triple DES GDES Hashed Message Authentication Code Message Digest 5 HMAC MD5 and HMAC Secure Hash Algorithm 1 SHA 1 The Crypto Module is an optional feature of J2320 and J2350 Services Routers To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your router issue the show chassis hardware command m Compact flash Provides primary storage for software images configuration files and microcode J series routers have a primary or internal compact flash located on the system board For information about replacing the internal compact flash see Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 180 J2320 and J2350 Services Routers also provide a slot in the rear of the chassis into which you can insert an additional external compact flash For information about external compact flashes see J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes on page 24 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices J2320 and J2350 Services Routers can boot from three devices m Internal compact flash m External compact flash also known as the removable compact flash m USB storage device Normally a J2320 or J2350 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash If the internal compact flash fails the rou
378. us sont destin es assurer la protection du personnel m Lerack sur lequel est mont le Juniper Networks router doit tre fix la structure du b timent m Sicette unit constitue la seule unit mont e en casier elle doit tre plac e dans le bas m Si cette unit est mont e dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placant l l ment le plus lourd dans le bas m Sile casier est quip de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de r parer l unit en casier A WARNING Warnung Zur Vermeidung von K rperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell m ssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen da das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gew hrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen m Der Juniper Networks router mu in einem Gestell installiert werden das in der Gebaudestruktur verankert ist m Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden m Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gef llten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist m Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubeh r geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten A WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici dura
379. ust contain at least one change of case or character class For Common Criteria environments only the password must be between 10 and 20 characters long and must include at least three of the five character classes uppercase letters lowercase letters punctuation marks numbers and other special characters Control characters are not recommended For more information see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Time Zone and System Time You define the time zone for the location where you plan to operate the Services Router by using a designation that consists of the following information for the location Name of the continent or ocean For example America or Atlantic m Name of the major city or other geographic feature in the time zone For example Detroit or Azores A Network Time Protocol NTP server provides accurate time across a network The router synchronizes the system time with the NTP server and periodically accesses the NTP server to maintain the correct time The time zone and system time must be accurate so that the router schedules events and operations as expected For Common Criteria compliance you must configure NTP to provide accurate timestamps for system log messages For more information see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Basic Connectivity Overview MN 1321 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Network
380. ut you can use any built in Ethernet port for management After the initial configuration is complete you can attach the built in Ethernet port that you are using for management purposes to the management network Before initial configuration when the factory default configuration is active the router attempts to perform autoinstallation by obtaining a router configuration through all its connected interfaces including ge 0 0 0 The Services Router acts as a DHCP client out the built in Ethernet interfaces If the Services Router does not find a DHCP server within a few seconds it sets the address of ge 0 0 0 to 192 168 1 1 24 and becomes a DHCP server out the ge 0 0 0 interface E NOTE If the ge 0 0 1 interface is being used it is set to 192 168 2 1 24 With the router temporarily acting as a DHCP server you can manually configure it with the J Web interface Any DHCP client host for example a PC or laptop computer directly connected to ge 0 0 0 receives an address on the 192 168 1 1 24 network C NOTE The DHCP functionality for initial setup is different from the configurable DHCP server functionality of the Services Router during operation To configure the Services Router as a DHCP server see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Once you connect your laptop or PC to ge 0 0 0 you can use a Web browser to visit the address 192 168 1 1 24 access the J Web Set Up Quick Configuration page and complete t
381. uter and controls the routing protocols that run on the router m Provides control and monitoring functions for the router including controlling power and monitoring system status m Packet Forwarding Engine Processes packets applies filters routing policies and other features and forwards packets to the next hop along the route to their final destination For information about Routing Engine hardware see J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 18 and J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 51 Kernel and Microkernel The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS software processes by doing the following m Linking the routing tables maintained by the routing protocol process with the forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine m Coordinating communication with the Packet Forwarding Engine primarily by synchronizing the Packet Forwarding Engine s forwarding table with the master forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine The microkernel contains device drivers and processes that the Packet Forwarding Engine uses to govern the flow of packets through the Services Router JUNOS Software Processes 40 m Software Overview The JUNOS software running on the Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine consists of multiple processes that are responsible for individual Services Router functions The separation of functions provides operational stability be
382. ve rise to any obligation to support the Software Support services may be purchased separately Any such support shall be governed by a separate written support services agreement TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOSS OF DATA OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES OR FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK In no event shall Juniper s or its suppliers or licensors liability to Customer whether in contract tort including negligence breach of warranty or otherwise exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim or if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product the price paid by Customer for such other produ
383. vider for details on the following information m External NT1 device and ISDN cable m Ifthe two items are required where to obtain the items m List of NTI vendors Site Preparation Checklist The checklist in Table 55 on page 112 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site for Services Router installation Table 53 Site Preparation Checklist Item or Task Performed By Date Notes Verify that environmental factors such as temperature and humidity do not exceed router tolerances Measure the distances between external power sources and the router installation site Select the type of rack 112 Mm Network Cable Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Table 53 Site Preparation Checklist continued Item or Task Performed By Date Notes Plan the rack location including required space clearances Secure the rack to the floor and the building structure Acquire appropriate cables and connectors Site Preparation Checklist m 113 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 114 1H Site Preparation Checklist Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Make the appropriate preparations and verify the J series equipment before installing a J series Services Router and connecting it to a power source and the network CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maxim
384. vides primary storage for software images configuration files and microcode J4350 and J6350 routers have a slot on the motherboard for an internal compact flash For information about replacing the compact flash see Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 185 J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices The 4550 and 6550 Services Routers can boot from two devices m Internal compact flash m USB storage device Normally the J4350 or 6550 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash If the compact flash fails the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features BN 321 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J4350 and J6350 Front Panel The front panel of the Services Router see Figure 19 on page 32 allows you to install or remove PIMs view router status LEDs access the console port and perform simple control functions Figure 19 Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis POWER STATUS RESET CONFIG Physical Interface Modules PIMs LED LED button al v E E i e J J d JL n JL k i P o igi I EP i s i D omo og o al 004 omo O i aus PORTO PORT STATUS sms PORT 1 STATUS N se Poor of mn 7 EZ SLOT NUMBER _ AE BSS ary
385. w at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance between the left and right sides of the chassis and adjacent equipment In J4350 and J6550 routers allow at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance between the front and back of the chassis and adjacent equipment Follow ESD procedures described in Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 249 to avoid damaging equipment Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time Install blank PIM panels in empty slots to prevent any interruption or reduction in the flow of air across internal components General Site Guidelines m 101 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Rack Requirements J series Services Routers must be installed in a rack Many types of racks are acceptable including front mount racks four post telco racks and center mount racks The following sections describe rack requirements m Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 102 m Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 103 m Connection to Building Structure on page 105 Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers 102 m The J2320 and j2550 Services Routers are designed for installation in a rack that complies with either of the following standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http
386. wer supply is connected but the router is not powered on For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 122 NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location J6350 Power System The J6350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power You can install one or two autosensing load sharing power supplies on the system board at the bottom of the chassis as shown in Figure 15 on page 28 or Figure 17 on page 29 The power supplies distribute the different output voltages to the router components depending on their voltage requirements When two power supplies are installed and operational they automatically share the electrical load For full redundancy two power supplies are required If a power supply stops functioning for any reason the second power supply instantly begins providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning It can provide full power indefinitely Each power supply has an LED located to the upper right of the power supply connector Table 16 on page 57 describes the power supply LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 105 For informati
387. wer tokens for the J2350 router user host gt show chassis power ratings Device Low Medium High Heat Ratings Power Power Power Total Tokens 83 83 83 83 FPC 1 6 5 27 21 OK FPC 2 3 4 27 18 OK FPC 3 0 0 0 0 Empty FPC 4 0 0 0 0 Empty FPC 5 2 1 0 2 Exceeded Tokens Used 12 10 55 42 ec NOTE In the show chassis power ratings command output the PIM slot number is reported as an FPC number The offline PIM is not powered off but continues to draw minimal power 2 To bring the PIM online you have the following options m Remove one or more PIMs from the chassis This option requires that you power off the router For more information about removing PIMs see Removing a PIM on page 174 m To bring the PIM online without powering off the router use the set chassis fpc offline command to set another PIM slot in the chassis to the offline state For example Troubleshooting Power Management WM 213 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide userGhost set chassis fpc 2 offline If the power and heat tokens no longer exceed the maximum the PIMs that were placed offline by J series power management are brought online automatically m Usethe set chassis disable power management command to disable J series power management user host set chassis disable power management CAUTION Use extreme caution when disabling J series power management To prevent equipment damage do no
388. x link activity 4 port ebiMi a e 65 link status 4 port ePIM ssssssss 65 LINK SPEED status dual port PIM sss 61 RJ 45 connector pinout sssssssssse 255 FCC Part 15 compliance statement 284 FCC Part 68 compliance statement 284 feature licenses See licenses feature OVEIVICWS cero Ii dete eaten eed 1 field replaceable units replacimg 175 filter cover See air filter filter air See air filter fire extinguishers prohibited 4 4 sd deer M e idet 105 Tequited etia ale e y sete toe tele alan ieee 105 fire safety reguirementg ren 104 fire suppression equipment Tegulred iiaa a 105 shutdown regulrement 104 LONE CONVENTIONS Sias a edet edi ere e xvii forwarding software Drocess 40 FPC PIM slot number in command displaVS 3 uten tede t teresa etna 178 215 front Panel wees ii ntt egeret et pata let ets 19 52 FRUs field replaceable units replacing 175 Dwdd Process i ood ett gs eO pepe E URL UE 40 G G SHDSL PIM ed lge 66 PIM ONLINE CED tte e sett tet ete ette tegis 67 G SHDSL ports See SHDSL ports Gateway Module See TGM550 gateway default darun ee tie rc tpe e s 152 ge 0 0 0 connecting through J Web ssssssssese 155 defining address configuration editor 148 defining address Quick Configuration 144 for autoinstallarton Siea Aai 155 management Interface 133 Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs da Si aad er a
389. ximums permitted for your J series chassis as specified in Table 52 on page 112 Table 51 on page 110 shows the power consumption and heat dissipation represented in non dimensional tokens assigned to each J series PIM Table 51 J series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation Name Model Number PIM Abbreviation Tokens in JUNOS CLI Power Heat 1 Port Gigabit JXU SFP S 1xSFP uPIM 8 8 Ethernet uPIM 6 Port Gigabit JXU 6GE SFP S 6xSFP uPIM 13 13 Ethernet uPIM 8 Port Gigabit JXU 8GE TX S 8xGE uPIM 21 27 Ethernet uPIM 16 Port Gigabit JXU 16GE TX S 16xGE uPIM 58 56 Ethernet uPIM 1 Port Copper JXE 1GE TX S 1xGE Copper 6 7 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 Port SFP Gigabit JXE 1GE SFP S 1xGE SFP 4 4 Ethernet ePIM Dual Port Serial JX 2Serial S 2xSerial 5 6 PIM Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Table 51 J series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation continued Name Model Number PIM Abbreviation Tokens in JUNOS CLI Power Heat Dual Port El PIM JX 2E1 RJ48 S 2xE1 6 6 Dual Port T1 PIM JX 2T1 RJ48 S 2xT1 6 5 Dual Port JX 2CT1E1 RJ45 S 2xCT1E1 PRI 6 5 Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM E3 PIM 1 port JX 1E3 S 1xE3 if 7 T3 PIM also JX 1DS3 S 1xT3 7 7 known as DS5 Dual Port Fast JX 2FE TX S 2xFE 6 6 Ethernet PIM 4 Port Fas JXE 4FE TX S AxF
390. xternal compact flash cover to the rear of the chassis see Figure 85 on page 187 Figure 83 Removing the External Compact Flash Cover Compact flash cover 6 Remove the compact flash cover 7 Eject the external compact flash by pressing the ejector button to the left of the compact flash slot once to unlock the button and again to eject the compact flash see Figure 84 on page 187 Figure 84 Removing the External Compact Flash Eject button d i SA m A Compact flash 8 Gently grasp the compact flash and slide it out of the slot 9 Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 10 With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards the router insert the new compact flash in the external compact flash slot see Figure 85 on page 187 Figure 85 Inserting the External Compact Flash 9004133 ES Compact flash 11 Replace the compact flash slot cover Replacing External Compact Flashes m 187 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 Tighten the pan head screws that secures the compact flash slot cover to the rear of the chassis 15 Plug the power cord into the power supply 14 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing USB Storage Devices USB storage devices are optional components on J series Services Routers If installed
391. y than dynamic routes If all dynamic routes to an address are lost from the routing table and the router receives a packet for that address the dialer interface initiates an ISDN backup connection and sends the packet over it See also dial on demand routing backup floating static route dial on demand routing DDR backup Feature that provides a J series Services Router with full time connectivity across an ISDN line When routes on a primary serial T1 E1 T5 E5 Fast Ethernet or PPPoE interface are lost an ISDN dialer interface establishes a backup connection To save connection time costs the Services Router drops the ISDN connection after a configured period of inactivity Services Router with ISDN interfaces support two types of dial on demand routing backup on demand routing with a dialer filter and dialer watch See also dialer filter dialer watch dialer watch Dial on demand routing DDR backup feature that provides reliable connectivity without relying on a dialer filter to activate the ISDN interface The ISDN dialer interface monitors the existence of each route on a watch list If all routes on the watch list are lost from the routing table dialer watch initiates the ISDN interface for failover connectivity See also dial on demand routing backup dying gasp notification Ability of a Services Router with a digital subscriber line DSL connection that has lost power to send a message informing the attached

Juniper Networks J2320 Network Router User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents